nc500 Software Ing

62)7:$5(86(5·60$18$/
6RIWZDUH
5RYHU1&
UHOHDVH
IRU1&
QXPHULFDOFRQWURO
5804A0046 ENGLISH
Issue.Revision: 1.0
Serial number
481/96
,QIRUPDWLRQRQWKLVSXEOLFDWLRQ
Code: Issue: Revision: Approval number:

5804A0046 1 0 (02, 2000) 99/0468M
List of changes
Revision: Additions §: Deletions §: Changes §:
0(*)
(*). Based on (previous document) 5804A0031.
This manual has been prepared for use by clients only and it contains information protected by
copyright. It must not be photocopied or reproduced in any form, either fully or in part, without the
prior written consent of BIESSE. The manual is supplied together with the machine, and must be
kept in a safe place in order to have it always to hand for consultation.
The manual must only be used by personnel who have been adequately trained to operate the
machine. BIESSE cannot be considered responsible or liable for damage resulting from incorrect
or improper use of the documentation provided. In order to avoid incorrect manoeuvres that might
result in danger to the operator or to third parties, it is essential to read and fully understand all the
documentation supplied with the machine.
BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(5804a0046.fm-250200)


(5804a0046.fm-250200)
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Field of application and limits of the manual . . . . . . . . . 15
Documents supplied with the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Warning signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Part 1 - Description
&KDSWHU 8VHULQWHUIDFH
1.1 Software environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Page structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1 Page heading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2.2 Page body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Command fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Popups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Status bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Graphics area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.3 Page menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
&KDSWHU 8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
EDITOR\OPTIMISED BORINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
EDITOR\ASSISTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ISO INTERPRETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
CAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
WORK TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
EDITOR\SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
AUTOMATIC\PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
AUTOMATIC\LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
UTIL\MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
DATA\BARCODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
STATISTICS EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
UTIL\DEBUGGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
&KDSWHU 2UJDQLVDWLRQRIWKHGLUHFWRULHVILOHVDQGGULYHV
3.1 Structure of directories (dir) and types of file contained . . . 3-1
3.2 Description of drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)

7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
Part 2 - Uses
&KDSWHU 6WDUWLQJVWRSSLQJDQGUHVWRULQJ
4.1 Starting the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Emergency stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.3 Stopping and cancelling a program during running . . . . . . . 4-2
4.4 Recovering from emergency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.5 Resuming running of the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
&KDSWHU *HQHUDOVRIWZDUHVHWXS
5.1 Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Entering the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Deleting the password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Software setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.3 Calendar and clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.4 Reference for axis co-ordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Axis co-ordinates for spindle 1 with respect to origins . . 5-3
Spindle axis positions with respect to absolute origin . . 5-3
Slot axis positions with respect to absolute origin . . . . . 5-4
5.5 Data configuration for import of DXF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.6 Data configuration for import of CID files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
&KDSWHU 5XQQLQJSURJUDPV
6.1 Information on running methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Running a program in automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.3 Running a program in semiautomatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.4 Running a work list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.5 Starting the program after a WAIT C/TRASL suspension . . 6-3
6.6 Starting the program after a WAIT C/SBLOC suspension. . 6-3
6.7 Starting the program after a WAIT S/SBLOC suspension. . 6-3
6.8 Simulation of the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
&KDSWHU 0DQDJLQJWKHEDUFRGHUHDGHU
7.1 Configuring the serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Procedure for using the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
&KDSWHU $X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV
8.1 Special keyboard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Zoom and panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Accessing alphanumeric text to make modifications . . . 8-1
8.2 Data Backup - Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Machine data backup - restore procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
User data backup - restore procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Reading the numbering of spindles and electrospindles . . . 8-4
8.4 Reading the machine operating status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.5 Resetting planned maintenance times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.6 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.7 Displaying machine identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.8 Displaying software identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
Part 3 - Tooling
&KDSWHU 0DQDJHPHQWRID[LVPRYHPHQW
9.1 Automatic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Manual reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.3 Movements in manual mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.4 MDI positioned movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.5 Varying the travel speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
&KDSWHU )RUFHGPRYHPHQWVIRUVHWXSRIWKHPDFKLQH
10.1 Lowering the boring unit spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.2 Lowering the electrospindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Opening/closing the tool magazine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.4 Raising or positioning the tool holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
&KDSWHU 3URJUDPPLQJWRROLQJRSHUDWLRQV
11.1 Cataloguing tools and aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Boring unit tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Tools for collet spindles and aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2 Configuration of the boring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Replacing the current configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Deleting a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3 Configuration of electrospindles/slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Replacing the current configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Deleting a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.4 Configuration of the tool magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.5 Working table setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Setting setup position values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Part 4 - Programming machining operations
&KDSWHU 1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
12.1 Programmable machining operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Programmable boring operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Programmable milling operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Programmable cutting operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.2 Representation of the piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Measurement of corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.3 General programming operations to be performed. . . . . . . 12-7
&KDSWHU 'UDZLQJSURILOHVLQ35)IRUPDW
13.1 Information on the CAD page graphics area. . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Base element labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Colours of drawing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Popup fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Moving the open popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Selecting the base elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Selecting profile elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)

7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
13.2 CAD setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

13.3 Creating the reference panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.4 Creating the base drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.5 Description of drawing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.5.1 Point command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Cartesian Co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Polar Co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Line-line intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Line-circle intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Circle-circle intersect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Point centre circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.5.2 Line command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Through 2 XY pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Through two known points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Through XY p. with angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Thr. known point w. angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Parallel to known line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Circle tang. through poin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Tangent 2 known circles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Perp. line through point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Circle tang. with angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Parallel to an axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.5.3 Circle command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
By XY centre and radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
By XY centre XY point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
By known centre radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
By 2 known points radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
By 3 known points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Concentric to circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Tangent 2 known lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Tangent 2 known circles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Circle-line tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Tangent circle through pnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
By XY pair and point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
By P1 centre and P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
For P centre circle tg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Line tang through pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.6 Setting the parameters of the base drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13.7 Modifying the base drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Modifying base elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Copying base elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Moving base elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Deleting base elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.8 Deleting the whole base drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.9 Rotating the base drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.10 Creating a profile by tracing over elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13.11 Deleting the last profile element created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.12 Creating the profile by joining up points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.13 Highlighted display of profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
13.14 Procedures on the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Inserting connecting sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Inserting bevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Inserting the tool lead-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
Inserting the tool lead-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

Inserting the tool lead-in and lead-out simultaneously. . 13-28
Inserting the tool lead-in and/or lead-out automatically . 13-28
Setting the working depth on the elements . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Breaking up the elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Deleting elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Reversing the direction of movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Rotation around the centre of the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Rotation around a point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Copy and rotation around a point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Turning on axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Partial turning on axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Tool radius correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
13.15 Creating a concentric profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
13.16 Importing a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.17 Joining open profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.18 Deleting the profile on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.19 Deleting the tool radius correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.20 Total deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
13.21 Setting profile position values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
Value x between 2 points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Value y between 2 points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Point value on side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Dist x betw. p1 and p2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Dist y betw. p1 and p2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Arc radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Value xy centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Delete values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Insert text on segment X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text on segment Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text on arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text on point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text on centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text in X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Insert text in Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
&KDSWHU 'UDZLQJSURILOHVLQ';)IRUPDW
14.1 Option DXF-gen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.2 Option DXF-2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Layer names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.3 Basic notions when drawing DXF-2D type profiles . . . . . . . 14-3
Creating working dimensions of piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Creating a vertical bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Creating an horizontal bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Creating a cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Creating a milling operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)

7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
&KDSWHU 'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
15.1 Creating an EGA drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Entering connections in the EGA drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Description of EGA drawing commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Description of fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
&KDSWHU 3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
16.1 Creating the program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.2 Opening, changing and saving a program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.3 Parameter-guided adjustment of the program. . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Entering expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.4 Deleting a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16.5 Programming optimised boring operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Vertical boring on straight line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Vertical boring on angled line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Vertical boring on circumference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Horizontal boring on straight line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
16.6 Programming optimised borings using macros . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Accessing the parameters of the macros for changing the values
16-8
Using macros for optimised boring operations . . . . . . . . 16-9
Macro BSM1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro BSM2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro BSM3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro BSM4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro BSM5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro BSM6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Macro BSM7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.7 Programming non-optimised boring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Vertical boring using boring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Vertical boring on straight line with slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Vertical boring on angled line with slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical boring on a circumference with slot . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal boring using the boring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal boring with slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis C boring on a segment of the profile . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis C boring on an arc of the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.8 Setting milling operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Elements and geometrical figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Milling for assembly of tops at 90° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-43
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
Profiles for doors preset by BIESSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
16.9 Description of the fields for technological data . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
16.10 Setting cutting operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54
Vertical cut along the X axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54
Vertical cut along the Y axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-55
Vertical cutting with positioning by means of the C axis. 16-56
16.11 Setting piece thickness tracing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-57
16.12 Programming steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-58
Jumping a program line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-58
Linear tool movement in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-59

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
Temporary translation of program point of origin . . . . . . 16-60

Integration of optimised boring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-61
Program stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-61
"M" instructions for the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-62
16.13 Settings used when working on surface 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-62
Using surface 5C during EGA programming . . . . . . . . . 16-63
Use of surface 5C during CAD profile programming . . . 16-65
16.14 Downloading external files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-66
16.15 Creating the work list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-67
16.16 Opening, modifying and saving the work list. . . . . . . . . . . . 16-67
16.17 Deleting the work list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-68
&KDSWHU 0DQDJHPHQWRI,62SURJUDPPLQJ
17.1 Interpreting programs and subprograms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.2 Auxiliary functions for ISO expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
&KDSWHU 0DQDJHPHQWRIVWDWLVWLFV
18.1 Procedure for use of statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
18.2 Setting the term for storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.3 Setting the operator identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.4 Programming events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.5 Enabling statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
18.6 Marking events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
18.7 Real-time updating of current statistics file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.8 Graphic display of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.9 Disabling statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.10 Opening and reading statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.11 Deleting statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Appendices
$SSHQGL[$ &1,,62SURJUDPPLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
A.1 List of Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Description of instruction qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.1.1 Modal instruction G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.2 Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.2.1 Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Numeric constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Alphanumeric constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.2.2 Parameters and vectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Numeric parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Alphanumeric parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Special parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.2.3 Operators and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Priority and association levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Arithmetic operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Relational operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Logical operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Numerical functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Alphanumeric-numeric conversion function: . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)

7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
A.3.1 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

A.3.2 End of program or subroutine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.3 Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.4 Program steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.5 Line repetitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.6 Units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Programming in millimetres or in inches . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.3.7 Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.3.8 Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Absolute or machine origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
External or piece origin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Program or internal origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Change of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.3.9 Movement of axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Assignment of an absolute value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Assignment of an incremental value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Assignment of operating speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Assignment of acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.10 Reading of assigned positions and origins . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.11 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Advance declaration of "Axes positioned" . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Modal instructions "Gexpr" for positionings . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A.3.12 Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Linear interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Circular interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Elliptical interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Helicoidal interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A.3.13 Bevel and contiguous segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Contiguous elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A.4 Programming of spatial work directions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A.4.1 Spatial orientation of spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A.4.2 Spatial orientation of aggregates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A.5 A.G.P. Assisted Geometric Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.5.1 Instructions for Geometric Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.5.2 Use of discriminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A.5.3 List of cases resolved by A.G.P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A.5.4 Examples of possible A.G.P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A.5.5 Example program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A.6 Tool Radius Correction (CRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.6.1 Instructions for Correction of Tool Radius . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.6.2 Linear engagement and disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A.6.3 Circular engagement and disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A.6.4 Immediate change in correction direction. . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A.6.5 Correction for different types of intersections . . . . . . . . . A-53
Line-line intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
Intersection line-circumference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
Intersection Circumference-Circumference . . . . . . . . . . A-56
Intersection Line-Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Intersection with Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
A.6.6 Examples of work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A.6.7 Speed check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
A.7 Spindles and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)
7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV
A.7.1 Configuration of head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61

A.7.2 Selection of spindles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
A.7.3 Reference spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
A.7.4 Rotation speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
A.8 Program jumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
A.8.1 Unconditional jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
A.8.2 Conditional jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
A.9 Subroutines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
A.9.1 Internal subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
A.9.2 External user subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
A.9.3 External "Fixed Cycles" subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
A.9.4 Subroutine call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
External subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
Internal subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
A.9.5 Subroutine levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
A.10 Example of program: panca . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
$SSHQGL[% (UURUPHVVDJHV
B.1 User interface messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
List of code B messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
List of code C messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
List of code E messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
List of code G messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
List of code M messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
List of code U messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B.2 Machine messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
List of ECN_ messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
List of code Err messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
List of code PLC_ messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
$SSHQGL[& *ORVVDU\

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)

7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV

(5804a0046TOC.fm-250200)
,QWURGXFWLRQ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The software can be used with a numerical control (NC) or with a personal computer (PC)
connected to a NC. The PC software is optional, and will be supplied separately only when
requested by the client.
)LHOGRIDSSOLFDWLRQDQGOLPLWVRIWKHPDQXDO
This manual describes the normal operations and procedures required to create programs that
can be run using the software. The manual is aimed at users of the machine to which the software
is connected. Before reading this manual, please consult the MACHINE USER’S MANUAL and
relative ENCLOSURES, in order to obtain a thorough knowledge of the machine and how to
operate it safely.
'RFXPHQWVVXSSOLHGZLWKWKHPDFKLQH
MACHINE USER’S MANUAL. This contains the fundamental information required by the operator
in order to use the machine. It also provides the instructions necessary to perform proper machine
maintenance operations.
SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE. This is used to order components that must be replaced, following
the instructions given in the introduction to the manual.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS. These describe the main plants of the machine (electric, pneumatic, etc.)
and are provided for the technician responsible for solving problems. This technician must be
expert and competent in his job.
ENCLOSURES. These contain information on any special parts of the machine. In order not to
miss any important information, each Enclosure must be consulted together with the document to
which it refers.
:DUQLQJVLJQV
Paragraphs that should not be overlooked are highlighted and preceded by the symbols described
and illustrated below:

(a202h001.fm-250200)

,QWURGXFWLRQ
PERICOLO
Paragraphs marked with this symbol indicate an imminent danger, and the contents must
therefore be taken into careful account in order to prevent a serious accident.
CAUTELA
Paragraphs marked with this symbol indicate procedures to be used and actions to be
taken to avoid any damage to goods and property.
INFORMAZIONI
This symbol is used to indicate points of particular importance that must not be overlooked.
:DUQLQJV
Before using the machine, read the safety information provided in the MACHINE USER’S
MANUAL.

(a202h001.fm-250200)
3DUW'HVFULSWLRQ

(a302h001.fm-250200)
(a302h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 8VHULQWHUIDFH
The user interface is the group of elements that allow the operator and the machine to “converse”.
The user interface is made up of both hardware and software elements.
Hardware interface The group of physical units making up the data processing
system, and which allow the software to be used. For the
software described in this manual, the hardware interface
corresponds to a Personal Computer of the following type:
DESKPRO COMPAQ
- WINDOWS 95 operating system,
- 32MB ram,
- CD-ROM 32X,
- floppy-disk drive 1.44MB,
- monitor 15”,
- 10MBIT COMBO type network card,
- USA keyboard and mouse.
Software interface The group of languages and programs that allow the
numerical control to perform data processing operations.
The conversation takes the form of on-screen display of data and information by the machine, and
input of commands and data by the operator.
6RIWZDUHHQYLURQPHQWV
The information provided in this paragraph give a general view of the structure and performance of
the software.
The software is everything that appears on screen, and it is divided into functional areas known as
“environments”. An environment is a group of pages by means of which the user can display and
manage data; each page is designed to carry out specific functions relating to the respective
environment.

(a203h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
The following is a list of the environments that make up the software.
Manual environment The group of pages using which it is possible to manage

movement and zeroing of axes. This environment is made up
of the single page MANUAL, which is also used as the main
reference point when moving around within the software.
Setup environment The group of pages using which it is possible to manage the
data configuring machine parts, units and accessories. This
environment has the following pages:
- UTIL\MAINTENANCE
- UTIL\CONFIGURATION
- UTIL\DEBUGGER
- DEBUG\SYSTEM MONITOR
- DATA\GENERAL DATA
- DATA\AXES PARAM.
- DATA\HEAD CORRECTORS
- DATA\TOOL TABLES
- DATA\TOOLING
- DATA\DRILL-BIT CYCLES
- DATA\MAGAZINE MANAG.
- DATA\AGGREGATES
- DATA\BAR CODES
Editor environment The group of pages using which the piece machining
programs are created. This environment has the following
pages:
EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA.
EDITOR\ASSISTED
EDITOR\OPTIMISED BORINGS
EDITOR\SIMULATION.
CAD.
WORK TABLE
ISO INTERPRETER
BS PAINT
Automatic environment The group of pages using which it is possible to run the
programs required to machine pieces. This environment has
the following pages:
AUTOMATIC\PROGRAM.
AUTOMATIC\WORK LIST.

(a203h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
Statistics environment The group of pages containing information on events that

occur during use of the machine, and information on both
machine and user productivity. This environment has the
following pages:
EDITOR STATISTICS.
MACHINE STATISTICS.
PRODUCTION STATISTICS.
RELIABILITY STATISTICS.
3DJHVWUXFWXUH
Each page is displayed singly on the full screen, and is divided into three areas. Each area is
made up of various different elements, which are associated to functions and information.
The following figure illustrates a page from the software and the areas it contains.
A Page heading.
B Page body.
C Page menu bar.

(a203h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
3DJHKHDGLQJ
This area is used to display information for the user’s reference, as shown in the following figure.
A B C D H
E F G
A Date and time.
B Tool rotation speed (controlled by inverter) during machining; the value is expressed in r.p.m.
C Page name.
D Serial connection operating state.
E Status bar (dark grey); it indicates the machine’s operating status, except on the CAD page,
where it indicates the current drawing mode.
F Comment bar (yellow); each comment is designed to help the user and is associated with the
position of the cursor.
G Error messages bar (red); each message includes a code and is described in the appendix to
this manual.
H Percentage value of the programmed axis speed; the value will vary if the override is used.
3DJHERG\
This area displays the content of the page, that is to say the communication elements and the
graphics area. The communication elements refer to the following:
n Data fields.
n Command fields.
n Popups.
n Tables.
n Lists.
n Status bars.
n Tool bar.

(a203h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
'DWDILHOGV
These are lines containing the data associated with machine functions or parts.
A B
Each field is made up of a name (A) and a value (B). The value can be one of three different types:
writable, pre-set, accessible.
The value is “writable” when it can be written or modified using the keys on the keyboard.
The value is “pre-set” when the symbol is shown, and it contains a list of pre-set values. To
scroll through the list, press a number or letter key until reaching the value required.
To select any data field, use the cursor keys. To confirm the value input in the data fields, press
ENTER.
&RPPDQGILHOGV
These are named buttons in the popups. Each command field has a function associated with the
popup to which it belongs.
The most common command fields are: Ok and Esc. Select Ok to accept the settings for data in
the popup, and select Esc to cancel the settings and return to the previous ones. The other
command fields will be described in the following chapters, as they are used.
To select a command field, use the cursor keys. To confirm the choice press ENTER.
INFORMAZIONI
In some cases, to close one window and open another one, it is necessary to select ESC; this
does not mean that the settings will be lost.

(a203h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
3RSXSV
The popups are small boxes with a grey background that allow data to be read and/or written.
They can contain groups of data fields, tables and optionally icons representing the data.
The boxes can be identified from the name that appears at the top. Also, it is possible to open
other boxes in sequence from the active box, some of which have no name; the data in these
boxes are merely a continuation of the data in the preceding box.
Name of the popup
7DEOHV
Each table is made up of a series of lines, divided into columns. At the top is the heading line
containing the name of the table and the headings of columns. Each line contains a data field,
corresponding to the headings. The first data field from the left is the reference to be used when
reading the other fields on the line.
Column Table name
Column heading
Line

(a203h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
/LVWV
There are two types of list, the options list and the machining list. The options lists appear when a
menu is selected, and contain selectable items associated with commands.
options list
The machining list is the box containing the programming lines. Each programming line contains a
series of information that makes the machine perform the operations. The following figure shows a
list of machining operations.
List of machining operations
6WDWXVEDUV
The status bars are displayed at the top of the page body, under the page heading. They appear
on pages that include a graphics area. They are made up of a group of data fields (read only) that
can indicate the program name, the active work list, the type of configuration enabled, the
dimensions of the piece (length, width, thickness), the operating status of the machine, the current
position of the cursor, etc..

(a203h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
The following figure shows an example of a status bar.
Status bar
*UDSKLFVDUHD
This part of the page is used to display the graphics representing parts of the machine and
machining operations. Explanations of the meaning of the coloures used in these graphics are
given in the paragraphs describing the software pages.
Graphics area

(a203h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH
3DJHPHQXEDU
This area is used to display the list of menus available on the current page. Each menu is
associated to one of the F... keys on the PC keyboard.
The symbol < on the first menu from the left indicates that there are other menus on the bar. To
display the other menus in the list, press F11 on the keyboard. This key is also called “shift-menu”.
Symbol

(a203h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHULQWHUIDFH

(a203h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
0$18$/
A D
B E
C F
Information A The axis reset state.

displayed
B The machine operating state.
C The type of reference used in the system for display of current

axis co-ordinates.
D The current axis position co-ordinates.
E Percentage value of the programmed axis speed.
F Number of rpm in the inverters.
Standard n Resetting and moving the axes, raising and lowering the
operations spindles.
performed
n Setting the reference used in the system for display of current
axis co-ordinates.
Method of access From any page in the software select the menu Manual. If the menu
is not displayed press F11 on the PC keyboard.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
(',725?352*5$0'$7$
C
B
Information A The graphics area showing the piece.

displayed
B Dimensions of the piece and suspension position.
C Name of the program, unit of measurement and configurations

to be used for the machining operation.
Standard n Management of programming, that is to say creating, opening,

operations modifying, saving, deleting a program.
performed
n Setting the unit of measurement.
n Setting the configurations to be used for the machining

operation.
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Edit and the option
Programs, or the menu Edit P.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
(',725?237,0,6('%25,1*6
D1 D2

displayed
B Name of the program and dimensions of the piece to be
machined using the program.
C Optimised boring programming lines.
D1 Bar with optimised boring set-up icons.
D2 Bar with optimised boring macro icons.
Standard n Programming operations relating to optimised boring.

operations
performed
Boring Edit, or the menu Edit F.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
(',725?$66,67('
A
E

displayed
C Optimised boring programming lines.
D Machining operations menu bar.
E Bar with icons for the options available for the selected
machining operation.
Standard n Programming various machining operations, with the exclusion

operations of optimised boring.
performed
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Edit and the option Ass
Editor, or the menu Edit A.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
,62,17(535(7(5
Information A The graphics area showing the piece and the machining
displayed operations.

C Programming lines in ISO language.
Standard n Programming machining operations in ISO language.

operations
performed n Interpretation and transformation of ISO language.
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Edit and the option ISO.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
&$'
B
A
Information A The graphics area showing the reference piece used to create
displayed the profile. For further information on the graphics area please
see the chapter on “Drawing profiles in PRF format”.
B The cursor pointer, used to select elements and points on

screen.
C In the status bar: the dimensions of the reference piece used to

create the profile (DIM X, DIM Y), the current cursor
co-ordinates (X, Y), the name of the open profile (FILE).
Standard n Management of profile programming, that is to say creating,

operations opening, modifying, saving, deleting a profile (*.PRF).
performed
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu CAD.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
:25.7$%/(
Information A The graphics area representing the machine’s work table. The
displayed colours used are the following: dark blue for the working outline
of the machine, light blue for the mobile piece supports, red for
the shapeable suction cups, yellow for the stops.
Standard n The work table configuration.

operations
performed
WrkTbl. Tool.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
(',725?6,08/$7,21
Information A The graphics area representing the simulation. The colours

displayed used are the following: green for the working dimensions of the
piece and the bores, red for the operating section, dark blue for
the bores being machined.
Standard n Simulation of optimised boring.

operations
performed
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Simula.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
$8720$7,&?352*5$0
Information A The graphics area showing the machining operations.

displayed
B A full list of machining operations.
C In the status bar: the name of the program being run, the
dimensions of the piece that can be machined using the
program, the machine operating state.
Standard n Running a program.

operations
performed
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Auto and the option
Programs.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
$8720$7,&?/,67
B A
C D
Information A The name of the list opened.

displayed
B The machine operating state.
C A list of programs in the open work list.
D The co-ordinates for the current position of each machine axis.
Standard n Running a list of programs.

operations
performed n Organisation of the quantity of pieces to be machined.
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Auto and the option Work
Lists.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
87,/?0$,17(1$1&(
Information A The software identification data, i.e. name, release, etc..

displayed
Standard n Changing software language.

operations
performed n Setting the date and time.
n File backup and restore procedures.
n Software memory management.
n Zeroing the planned maintenance hour counter.
n Setting the password.
n General setup of software and serial connections.
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Util and the option
Maintenance.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
'$7$?%$5&2'(
A B
Information A The barcode reader operating state.

displayed
B The field setting the operating mode for barcodes.
C The fields defining the type of barcode to be read.
Standard n Set-up of the software to run programs using barcodes.

operations
performed
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Data and the option
Barcode.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
67$7,67,&6(',725
A B
C D
Information A Events relating to the machine operating states and phases.

displayed
B Events relating to the reliability/duration of machine parts and
the number of pieces machined.
C Events relating to operator activities.
D General statistics.
Standard n Enabling and disabling statistics.

operations
performed n Setting operator data.
n Management of events to be included in statistics.
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Edit and the option Stat
editor.

(a204h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
8VHUVRIWZDUHSDJHV
87,/?'(%8**(5
B
A
Information A The state of the machine’s inputs and outputs.

displayed
B Description of PLC activities.
C Indication of the state of axes. Each column corresponds to an

axis, respectively from the left axis X, Y, Z.
Standard
INFORMAZIONI
operations
performed The user can only access this page in order to read the contents.
The data on this page must never be altered or tampered with,
unless specifically authorised and supervised by a BIESSE
technician.
Method of access From the MANUAL page, select the menu Util and the option
Debug.

(a204h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 2UJDQLVDWLRQRIWKHGLUHFWRULHV
ILOHVDQGGULYHV
6WUXFWXUHRIGLUHFWRULHVGLUDQGW\SHVRIILOHFRQWDLQHG
For Windows 95, 98 and NT operating systems, the software is made up of the directories
illustrated and described in the following chart. It is therefore recommended that you do not delete,
replace, rename or modify any of the directories or their contents.
Tree diagram Directory File
Attrezz Contains the tooling configurations for MND, PNT

spindles and slots, created by the user.
Bmp Contains the images used as icons by BMP

the CAD functions.
Cont Contains the CAD internal records. GEO
Datattr Contains the work table configurations. CNF
Disegni Contains the drawings of the parts DIS

used during tooling-up of the work table.
Distinte Contains the work lists created by the DST

user.
Files Contains the print-out configurations. PLT
Icomac Contains the images used as macro BMP

icons.
Icons Contains the images used as various ICO, BMP

icons in the software.
Iconesk Contains the images used as icons in BMP

the menus.

(a208h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
2UJDQLVDWLRQRIWKHGLUHFWRULHVILOHVDQGGULYHV
Tree diagram Directory File
Icopaint Contains the images created by the ICO

user and used as customised icons.
Ini Contains the internal statistics environment INI

data records.
Iso Contains the cycles, programs and -----

sub-programs created in CNI-ISO language.
Load Contains the files required to load data (various)

on the NC RTU card.
Macro Contains the macros preset by Biesse, MCR

for the Editor environment.
Pannelli Contains the programs created by PAN, DXF,

the user and the profiles imported using the CID
backup procedure.
Profili Contains the profiles created by the PRF

user.
Statmac Contains the machine statistics. (special)
Statprod Contains the production statistics (special)
Swap Contains the machine data. DAT, APL,

DIS
Temp Contains records of the temporary TMP

statistics information.

(a208h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
'HVFULSWLRQRIGULYHV
The following table gives a description of the selectable drives.
Drive Use
.: Allows access to the current directory, automatically selected by the

software according to the operations performed.
A: Allows access to the main disk directory.
C: Allows access to the main PC directory.

(a208h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU

(a208h002.fm-250200)
3DUW8VHV

(a303h001.fm-250200)
(a303h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 6WDUWLQJVWRSSLQJDQGUHVWRULQJ
6WDUWLQJWKHVRIWZDUH
To start the software the machine must be turned on (please see the MACHINE USER’S
MANUAL); the software will not work if the machine is turned off.
If the window displaying the software interface does not appear, click the NC500 icon located on
the Desktop (A) or in the Windows applications bar (B). Alternatively, restart the software from the
Start menu (C), selecting Programs, NC500 and clicking on NC500.
(PHUJHQF\VWRS
Should it be necessary to stop machine operations immediately, press the nearest emergency
button (please see the Machine user’s manual).

(a209h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
6WDUWLQJVWRSSLQJDQGUHVWRULQJ
6WRSSLQJDQGFDQFHOOLQJDSURJUDPGXULQJUXQQLQJ
Press the STOP button to stop movement of the axes, then press the RESET button to cancel
running of the program.
If any error messages are displayed in the bar provided, press the CLEAR button to delete them,
first taking note of the contents of the message.
5HFRYHULQJIURPHPHUJHQF\PRGH
Turn the emergency button used previously to stop machine operations; there are arrows marked
on the button to indicate the direction in which it must be turned (please see the Machine user’s
manual).
Then press the RESET button to restore normal operating conditions, and the CLEAR button to
delete any error messages that may be displayed in the message bar provided.
5HVXPLQJUXQQLQJRIWKHSURJUDP
1. Recover from emergency mode.
2. If the stoppage took place during machining operations it will be necessary to unload the
piece from the work table.
3. From the MANUAL page, check that all the axes are zeroed. If not, perform automatic zeroing
of all axes.
4. Load a new piece and start running the program in the same way as before the stoppage.

(a209h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU *HQHUDOVRIWZDUHVHWXS
3DVVZRUG
The password is used during modification of the data accessible from the menus Data and Util.
CAUTELA
The password can only be used by the operator who uses the NC to carry out tooling
operations, change the software language and perform data backup-restore operations.
(QWHULQJWKHSDVVZRUG
When the password is entered this enables permanent saving of data.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Util and the option Maintenance.
2. Select the menu Passw. Type in the number 210 and press ENTER; if the password has
been entered correctly, “Level H” should be displayed.
3. On completing the procedure, press ESC.
'HOHWLQJWKHSDVVZRUG
When the password is deleted this disables permanent saving of data. This allows the data to be
safeguarded against possible tampering, while at the same time allowing temporary modifications
only; when the NC is turned on again the previous data will be restored.
2. Select the menu Passw. Type in the number 0 (zero) and press ENTER; if the password has
been deleted correctly, “Level L” should be displayed.
3. On completing the procedure, press ESC.
6RIWZDUHVHWXS

(a205h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
*HQHUDOVRIWZDUHVHWXS
2. Enter the password.
3. Select the menu Setup and the option Setup to access setup of the following fields.
Edges: display mode for the corners of the piece.

Select Y to display the corresponding numbers, N if the corresponding
numbers are not to be displayed.
Sides: display mode for the sides of the piece.

Select Y to display the corresponding numbers, N if the corresponding
numbers are not to be displayed.
Join: default value for the field Ang tollerance described on page 16 - 48.
Toler. Angle: default value for the field Ang tollerance described on page 16 - 48.
I/O radius: default value for the field In-out radius described on page 16 - 48.
PC Serial: serial port for connection.
Mouse speed: speed of movement of the mouse.

Select S for slow movement, M for normal movement, H for fast movement.
Num. of axes: total number of axes present on the machine.
4. To save the setting, press ENTER on the field Ok.
&DOHQGDUDQGFORFN
1. To access the calendar and clock setting function, from the MANUAL page select the menu
Util and the option Maintenance.
2. Select the menu Date and then set the fields.
3. The date is set in the line containing the fields d/m/y (d=day, m=month, y=year); the clock is
set on the line containing the fields h/m/s/ (h=hour, m=minutes, s=seconds).
4. To confirm the setting, press ENTER on the field OK.

(a205h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
5HIHUHQFHIRUD[LVFRRUGLQDWHV
$[LVFRRUGLQDWHVIRUVSLQGOHZLWKUHVSHFWWRRULJLQV
Used to find how far spindle 1 is from the boring unit with respect to a work table origin (RG).
RG
Y
1. From the MANUAL page press shift-menu and select the menu Value, then the option Comp.
to origins.
2. In the field Origin type in the number of the origin required and press ESC; the positions of the
respective axes will be displayed.
6SLQGOHD[LVSRVLWLRQVZLWKUHVSHFWWRDEVROXWHRULJLQ
Used to find how far a spindle is from the boring head with respect to the absolute origin (AO).
AO
Y
1. From the MANUAL page press shift-menu and select the menu Value, then the option Comp.
to spindles.
2. In the field Spindle type in the number of the spindle required and press ESC; the positions of
the respective axes will be displayed.

(a205h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
6ORWD[LVSRVLWLRQVZLWKUHVSHFWWRDEVROXWHRULJLQ
Used to find how far away a slot is with respect to the absolute origin (AO).
AO Y
1. From the MANUAL page press shift-menu and select the menu Value, then the option
Regarding slot.
2. In the field Slot type in the number of the slot required and press ESC; the positions of the
respective axes will be displayed.
'DWDFRQILJXUDWLRQIRULPSRUWRI';)ILOHV
For correct interpretation and importation of DXF type files it is necessary to set the data relating to
layers (drawing elements). The setting consists of indicating the names of the layers with the
relative technological data. For example, to define the data in the layers for dimensions of piece: if
the layers are called PANEL and the thickness of the piece (technological data) is 18 mm, type
PANEL18 into the relative data field.
The following is the procedure to be used for data configuration.
2. Enter the password. Select the menu Setup and the option DXF Setup and proceed to set the
fields as indicated below.
Character for point: a letter of the alphabet used in place of the decimal point. For
example, if the letter K is typed in, a value such as 10.5 would be converted to
10K5.
Panel layer: type the name used for the layers representing the dimensions of the piece.
Side 1 holes layer: type the name used for the layers representing the bores
programmed on side 1 of the piece.

(a205h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
Cuts layer: type the name used for the layers representing the cuts programmed on the
piece.
Mills layer: type the name used for the layers representing the profile of the piece.
Y axis reverse: to be used to overturn the drawing along the Y axis; select Y to enable
overturning or N to disable overturning.
EGA profile: to be used to transform the drawing in the DXF file into an EGA profile, while
importing; select Y to enable transformation or N to disable transformation.
File DXF: to be used to define with which unit of measurement the DXF file being
imported has been programmed; select mm if it has been programmed in
millimetres or “ if it has been programmed in inches.
File PAN: to be used to define the unit of measurement to be associated with the PAN file
obtained after importing the DXF file; select mm to associate with millimetres or
“ to associate with inches.
The following table is accessed to set the blocks, as indicated below.
Blocks name: name of the block.
Diam: machining diameter representing the block.
Dpt: machining depth representing the block.
T: number indicating the type of bore (e.g. 1 for blind bore, 2 for through bore, etc.).
3. To save data, press ENTER on the field Save.
'DWDFRQILJXUDWLRQIRULPSRUWRI&,'ILOHV
1. From the page UTIL\MAINTENANCE select the menu Setup, the option CID Setup and
proceed to set the fields as indicated below.
File CID: to be used to define with which unit of measurement the CID file being imported
has been programmed; select mm if it has been programmed in millimetres or “
if it has been programmed in inches.

(a205h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
File PAN: to be used to define the unit of measurement to be associated with the PAN file
obtained after importing the CID file; select mm to associate with millimetres or
“ to associate with inches.
Profilo EGA: to be used to transform the drawing in the CID file into an EGA profile, while
importing; select Y to enable transformation or N to disable transformation.
2. Select the table Tipo Tcid and press ENTER to access field settings, associating the numbers
used in the CID file to identify the bores with the types of tool indicated.
3. To save data, press ENTER on the field Salva.

(a205h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 5XQQLQJSURJUDPV
,QIRUPDWLRQRQUXQQLQJPHWKRGV
This procedure commands the machine to perform machining operations on the piece. The
program to be used for the machining operations can be run either directly or using a work list. The
work list is a table that allows a sequence of programs to be prepared, using which the machining
operations can be carried out on a preset number of pieces.
Before being run, the program can also be checked by performing a simulation. The program can
be simulated with the piece on the machine, or on-screen only.
5XQQLQJDSURJUDPLQDXWRPDWLFPRGH
This is the normal (standard) procedure to be used when running a program. It is known as
“automatic mode” because the program is run from start to finish after the operator has given a
single initial consent.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Auto and the option Programs.
2. Select the menu Open and press ENTER to access the list. Move the cursor to the program
required and press ENTER to select it.
3. Press ENTER on the command field OK to confirm selection and open the program.
4. Select the menu START; the program is optimised and made available for running. Before
starting the working cycle it is possible to carry out simulation of the program to check that it
will run correctly.
5. This procedure is completed by performing the operations, described in the machine user’s
manual, required to load and lock the piece and to start machining.
5XQQLQJDSURJUDPLQVHPLDXWRPDWLFPRGH
This procedure is used during simulation of the program with the piece in the machine. It is know
as “semiautomatic mode” because the program is run step by step, each step requiring the
operator’s consent, so that the axis movements can be checked.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Auto and the option Programs.

(a217h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
5XQQLQJSURJUDPV
2. Select the menu Open and press ENTER to access the list. Move the cursor to the program
required and press ENTER to select it.
3. Press ENTER on the command field OK to confirm selection and open the program.
4. Select the menu START; the program will be made available for running.
5. Press the SEMIAUTOMATIC button on the command unit.
6. For the procedures required to load and lock the piece, and to start machining, please see the
machine user’s manual.
7. Following this, when the LED on the SEMIAUTOMATIC button flashes, press the RUN button
on the command unit; the first step of the program will be performed.
8. To perform the next step, press the RUN button; repeat for each subsequent step until
reaching the end of the program.
9. To exit this running mode, press the SEMIAUTOMATIC button again.
5XQQLQJDZRUNOLVW
This procedure consists of making a work list, that is to say a list of programs, available for
machining.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Auto and the option Work List.
2. Select the menu File and the option Open.
3. Press ENTER to access the list. Move the cursor to the list required and press ENTER to
select it.
4. Press ENTER on the command field OK to confirm selection and open the list.
5. Press ENTER to access the lines in the list, move the cursor to the line that corresponds to
the program to be run first, and select the menu START; the program will be made available
for running. The program will be run for a number of times equal to the number of pieces to be
machined.
6. This procedure is completed by performing the operations, described in the machine user’s
manual, required to load and lock the piece and to start machining.
INFORMAZIONI
The programs are made available for running in the order in which they appear on the list. Thus,
once the number of pieces to be machined using the current program has been completed, the
software will automatically move on to the next line in the list, performing the corresponding
program for the relative number of times.

(a217h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
5XQQLQJSURJUDPV
6WDUWLQJWKHSURJUDPDIWHUD:$,7&75$6/VXVSHQVLRQ
1. Select the opposite working area by pressing the relative START button (flashing) on the
machine.
2. Move the piece to the selected area and position it against the stops, then activate the pedal
enabling locking (see Machine user’s manual).
3. To restart the program, confirm selection of the working area by pressing the relative START
button on the machine; if the program does not contain any other suspensions it will continue
to run until completed.
6WDUWLQJWKHSURJUDPDIWHUD:$,7&6%/2&VXVSHQVLRQ
1. Select the working area containing the piece by pressing the relative START button (flashing)
on the machine.
2. Turn the piece over and position it against the stops, then activate the pedal enabling locking
(see Machine user’s manual).
3. To restart the program, confirm selection of the working area by pressing the relative START
button on the machine; if the program does not contain any other suspensions it will continue
to run until completed.
6WDUWLQJWKHSURJUDPDIWHUD:$,766%/2&VXVSHQVLRQ
1. Clean the working area containing the piece.
2. To restart the program, press the START button (flashing) on the machine; if the program
does not contain any other suspensions it will continue to run until completed.
6LPXODWLRQRIWKHSURJUDP
In this version the software only allows part of the program to be simulated: the part relating to
optimised boring.
1. From the page EDITOR\SIMULATION select the menu Hole 1 to identify the first step
(starting point) in the program.
2. To identify the next step, select the menu Next; repeat until returning to the first step.

(a217h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
5XQQLQJSURJUDPV

(a217h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 0DQDJLQJWKHEDUFRGHUHDGHU
The barcode reader is used to complete the work list automatically. All the information is contained
in the codes provided on the labels attached to pieces to be worked. Each code contains the
program name to be used, the number of pieces to be machined and any comments. In this way,
when the reader is passed over the piece label the code is read, allowing the software to decode
and transfer all the information onto the list. The list will then be made available for machining.
Connection of the barcode reader is described in the appendix to this manual.
&RQILJXULQJWKHVHULDOFRQQHFWLRQ
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Data and the option Barcode.
2. Set the Command data field to read Stop.
3. In the table underneath, set the data fields as indicated below, in order to divide into groups
the characters in the string on the label to be read. Each group has the job of transmitting
data to the numerical control, one group for the “name” of the program to be used, one group
for the “number” of pieces to be worked using the program, one group for the “comment”
(notes) on the program.
Example: the following is an example of the division into groups of the characters in the
label string.
Characters in the string/code
Program name group:

from character 0 to character 4
Piece number group:
from character 5 to character 7
Comment group: from character 8 to
character 9
Total number of characters in the

string/code

(a218h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
0DQDJLQJWKHEDUFRGHUHDGHU
On the line Name, set the data field From to indicate the character (included) from which
the group dedicated to the program name starts, and indicate the last character in the
group (included) in the data field To.
On the line Quantity, set the data field From to indicate the character (included) from
which the group dedicated to the number of pieces starts, and indicate the last character
in the group (included) in the data field To.
On the line Comment, set the data field From to indicate the character (included) from
which the group dedicated to the program comment starts, and indicate the last
character in the group (included) in the data field To.
In the field corresponding to the line Total Characters, set the total number of characters
making up the string.
4. Select the menu Setup and check that the data are set as indicated below.
Number of bit: 8.
Number of stop bits: 1.
Even bit: No.
Transmission speed: 9600 (baud).
5. Set the data field Command on the page displayed to indicate Read progr.
6. Configure the reader, following the instructions provided with it. For correct operation, set the
reader Transmission Control to XON/XOFF.
3URFHGXUHIRUXVLQJWKHUHDGHU
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Data and the option Barcode.
2. Access the Command data field and set the function desired, from the ones described below.
No command: barcode is not used.
Read progr: to receive the strings for the names of programs to be carried out from the
barcode reader.
Read list: to receive the strings for the names of work lists to be carried out from the
barcode reader.
Stop: to stop reception of the strings.
3. Select the menu Auto and the option Work list.
4. Using the reader, read the label corresponding to the first program to be run, and select the
menu START to enable automatic running of the labels read subsequently.

(a218h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU $X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV
6SHFLDONH\ERDUGIXQFWLRQV
=RRPDQGSDQQLQJ
These functions can be used to display certain parts of the piece more clearly during
programming. The following indicates the combinations of keys to be pressed, according to the
function required.
Function Purpose Key combination

Zoom To enlarge by a percentage. ctrl + cursor up
To reduce by a percentage. ctrl + cursor down
To see all the elements drawn. ctrl + cursor right
To see element inside the piece ctrl + cursor left
only.
Panning To move up. shift + cursor up
To move down. shift + cursor down
To move to the left. shift + cursor left
To move to the right. shift + cursor right
$FFHVVLQJDOSKDQXPHULFWH[WWRPDNHPRGLILFDWLRQV
This function can be used to add or delete characters in any data field or programming line,
without having to re-write the entire text.
To enable the function, position the cursor on the text to be modified and then press backspace or
shift + backspace, on the PC keyboard.
'DWD%DFNXS5HVWRUH
The backup procedure is used to create a copy of data so that they can be reloaded onto the
machine, in case of need, using the restore procedure. The machine configuration data (input by

(a222h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
$X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV
BIESSE technicians during installation and testing) are classified as “machine data”, whereas data
relating to configurations and programs created by the client are classified as “user data”.
Among the accessories supplied with the machine are some floppy disks for the NC, containing
the original machine data.
0DFKLQHGDWDEDFNXSUHVWRUHSURFHGXUH
1. Insert the floppy disk in the drive. From the MANUAL page select the menu Util and the option
Maintenance.
2. Enter the password. Select the menu Backup and the option Mac data.
3. Press ENTER to open the list and select the type of data, then press ENTER. The types of
data that can be selected are indicated below:
ALL_DATA item comprising all the machine data files

SPIND DATA boring head spindle offset
ROUT DATA slot offset
SPIN DRILL catalogue of boring head tools
ROUT DRILL catalogue of slot and aggregate tools
AXES PARAM axis parameters
SETUP DATA general machine setup
ORIGIN DATA origin offset
D.BIT CYCLE D bit cycles
LANG. software languages
MAC DATA general machine data
MAG DATA offset for tool holders present in the magazines
AGGREG DATA catalogue of aggregates
TOOLING DATA all tooling configurations created
BARCODE DATA barcodes
PLC DATA PLC constants
DXF DATA setup used to read *.DXF files
STAT DATA statistics setup and event configuration
4. To perform a backup, set the Source field to read CNC and the Destination field to read A:; to
perform a restore, set the fields in the opposite manner.

(a222h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
$X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV
5. Press ESC to cancel the procedure, otherwise confirm by pressing ENTER on one of the OK
fields.
8VHUGDWDEDFNXSUHVWRUHSURFHGXUH
1. Insert the floppy disk in the drive. From the MANUAL page select the menu Util and the option
Maintenance.
2. Enter the password. Select the menu Backup and the option User data.
3. Press ENTER to open the list and select the type of data, then press ENTER. The types of
data that can be selected are indicated below:
.* item comprising all the user data files (listed below)

.PAN optimised boring and program macros
.DST lists
.MND boring head tooling configurations
.PNT slot tooling configurations
.PRF profiles
.MCR milling macros
.CNF work table tooling configurations without piece
.APL work table tooling configurations with piece
.DIS drawings of the objects to be used for tooling of the work table
.DAT application data swap file
.STM machine statistics files
.STP production statistics files
.ISO programs and subprograms created in CNI-ISO language
4. Set the Source field to read CNC to perform a backup, or set it to read A: to perform a restore;
then type the file name in the Files field. When typing the name it is possible to use the
wildcard function * (asterisk) as you would under DOS.
5. Set the Destination field to read A: to perform a backup, or set it to read CNC to perform a
restore; then type the file name in the Files field. When typing the name it is possible to use
the wildcard function * (asterisk) as you would under DOS.
6. Press ESC to cancel the procedure, otherwise confirm by pressing ENTER on one of the OK
fields; the field Ok ? allows files to be excluded as required, whereas the field Ok carries out
the procedure directly.

(a222h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
$X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV
5HDGLQJWKHQXPEHULQJRIVSLQGOHVDQGHOHFWURVSLQGOHV
To find the number of a spindle or slot, proceed as described below.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Reset and the option Force spindle.
2. To access numbering of the boring unit spindles, select the Spindles command field (A), then
select the Spindles table (C) and press ENTER. To access numbering of the electrospindle
spindles, select the Routers command field (B), then select the Routers table (C) and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll through the table using the keyboard cursor keys. Each line contains a number which
corresponds to the spindle highlighted in the figure alongside.
4. To close the window, use the ESC command field or press the ESC key.
INFORMAZIONI
The numbering of spindles and slots is also described in the Machine user’s manual.
5HDGLQJWKHPDFKLQHRSHUDWLQJVWDWXV
To display the operating status, access the MANUAL page. One of the following statuses will be
displayed:
MANUAL: indicates that the machine is enabled for axis reset operations.
AUTOMATIC: indicates that the machine is running a program.
ALARM: indicates that the machine is in emergency mode.
JOG: indicates that jog movements of the axes are being carried out (in manual mode).
5HVHWWLQJSODQQHGPDLQWHQDQFHWLPHV
INFORMAZIONI
For information on application of this procedure, please see the MACHINE USER’S MANUAL.
1. From the MANUAL page, select the menu Util and the option Maintenance.
2. Enter the password. Select the menu Man Prog.
3. Select the Reset field corresponding to the maintenance operation performed on the
machine, and press ENTER.

(a222h004.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
$X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV
&DOFXODWRU
1. To access use of the calculator, from the MANUAL page, select the menu Util and the option
Maintenance.
2. Select the menu Calcul. To perform calculations move the cursor to the calculation fields
involved and press ENTER; the functions in the calculation fields are the same as those of a
normal pocket calculator.
'LVSOD\LQJPDFKLQHLGHQWLILFDWLRQGDWD
The machine identification data are the serial number and model name. To display these it is
necessary to access the Statistics environment and consult the part of the page containing
"general statistics information”.
'LVSOD\LQJVRIWZDUHLGHQWLILFDWLRQGDWD
The software identification data are the name and release. From the MANUAL page select the
menu Util and the option Maintenance. A table will appear at the top of the page containing
information on the software.

(a222h004.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
$X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQV

(a222h004.fm-250200)
3DUW7RROLQJ

(a304h001.fm-250200)
(a304h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 0DQDJHPHQWRID[LVPRYHPHQW
$XWRPDWLFUHVHW
Automatic reset is a procedure that serves to bring the axes to a position known to the software,
with respect to the machine’s absolute origin. This position is established during initial setup of the
machine and it allows the software to calculate the movement of axes correctly.
This reset is performed after starting up the software, or when an error message requires it to be
carried out. To carry out reset operations, proceed as indicated below.
1. Before proceeding, ensure that there is nothing blocking normal movement of the axes; from
the MANUAL page select the menu Reset and the option Autom reset.
2. Set the field Ax to XYZ and press ENTER on the START field. The axes will be reset
automatically; to cancel the procedure, select CANCEL and press ENTER.
If the reset operation has been completed correctly, the letter Y (Yes) should appear on the
MANUAL page in correspondence with each of the axes, as shown below.
0DQXDOUHVHW
CAUTELA
This type of resetting operation can only be carried out by the operator if authorised and
guided by a BIESSE technician. For further information, please contact the BIESSE service
department.
Manual reset consists in giving a “suitable” co-ordinate for the current position of axes, with
respect to the reference used by the co-ordinate display system.

(a215h003.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
0DQDJHPHQWRID[LVPRYHPHQW
0RYHPHQWVLQPDQXDOPRGH
These movements are also known as ”JOG movements”, as to perform them it is necessary to use
the JOG buttons on the command unit. They are generally performed during set-up of the
machine. To perform the movement, proceed as described below.
CAUTELA
Before proceeding, ensure that nothing is likely to obstruct normal movement of the axis in
question.
1. From the MANUAL page, scroll with the cursor until reaching the axis to be moved and press
ENTER to select it.
2. Use JOG+ and JOG- to move the axis. To move the axis quickly, press VEL+JOG (+ or -).
3. When movement has been completed, position the cursor over the previously selected axes
and press ENTER; after this it is recommended that you perform automatic resetting of axes.
INFORMAZIONI
After this it is recommended that you perform automatic zeroing of the axes, in order to return the
axes to the correct position.
0',SRVLWLRQHGPRYHPHQWV
CAUTELA
These movements are generally carried out during set-up of the machine, and they are only
to be performed by expert technicians. For further information, please contact the BIESSE
Service Department.
9DU\LQJWKHWUDYHOVSHHG
Variation of the axis travel speed is carried out using the OVERRIDE buttons on the command
unit. These buttons allow the speed to be varied by percentage with respect to the value indicated
in the machine data.
The speed is varied by pressing the OVERRIDE + button to increase and the OVERRIDE -- button
to decrease, the value being displayed in the heading of each software page.
INFORMAZIONI
Please see the machine user’s manual to find out when it is necessary to vary the axis travel
speed.

(a215h003.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU )RUFHGPRYHPHQWVIRUVHWXSRI
WKHPDFKLQH
/RZHULQJWKHERULQJXQLWVSLQGOHV
This procedure can be of use to facilitate assembly of tools, or to carry out in-depth maintenance
operations.
2. To access numbering of the boring head spindles, select the Spindles command field (A),
then select the Spindles table (C) and press ENTER.
3. Scroll through the table using the keyboard cursor keys. Each line contains a number that
corresponds to the spindle highlighted in the figure alongside. To force the required spindle to
lower, set the relative data field (D) to ON.
CAUTELA
When the tool assembly or maintenance operations have been completed it is
recommended that you restore the lowered spindles to their original position. To restore
the spindles to their original position, set the data field (D) to OFF.

(a233h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
)RUFHGPRYHPHQWVIRUVHWXSRIWKHPDFKLQH
/RZHULQJWKHHOHFWURVSLQGOHV
This procedure can be of use to facilitate assembly of tools, or to carry out in-depth maintenance
operations.
2. To access numbering of the electrospindles, select the Routers command field (B), then
select the Routers table (C) and press ENTER.
corresponds to the electrospindle highlighted in the figure alongside. To force the required
electrospindle to lower, set the relative data field (D) to ON.
CAUTELA
When the tool assembly or maintenance operations have been completed it is
recommended that you restore the lowered electrospindles to their original position. To
restore the electrospindles to their original position, set the data field (D) to OFF.
2SHQLQJFORVLQJWKHWRROPDJD]LQH
This procedure is carried out when the tool magazine is fitted with a cover, so as to allow access to
the tool holders.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Data and the option Magazines.
2. To open, select the menu Open. To close, select the menu Close.
3. In the Number data field, type in the number corresponding to the tool magazine required; this
is only necessary if the machine is fitted with more than one magazine.

(a233h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
5DLVLQJRUSRVLWLRQLQJWKHWRROKROGHUV
This procedure facilitates the operations required to insert collet spindles or aggregates into the
tool holders. If the tool magazine is fitted with a cover, this must be opened before this procedure is
activated.
1. From the MANUAL page select the menu Data and the option Magazines.
2. In the Number data field, type in the number corresponding to the tool magazine required; this
is only necessary if the machine is fitted with more than one magazine.
3. Select the table Magazine data and press ENTER to access the data.
corresponds to the tool holder highlighted in the figure underneath. To carry out forced raising
or positioning of the tool holder required, set the data field under the column Force to ON.
CAUTELA
When the insertion operations have been completed it is recommended that you restore the
raised tool holders to their original position. To restore the tool holders to their original
position, set the data field under the column Force to OFF.

(a233h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU

(a233h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 3URJUDPPLQJWRROLQJRSHUDWLRQV
Tooling is a phase during which the machine is set up to perform a specific machining operation.
To carry out tooling properly on the NC, proceed as indicated below, also referring to the Machine
user’s manual.
n Choose the set of tools and aggregates to be used with the machine.
n Enter the characteristics of the selected tools and aggregates in the cataloguing tables.
n Enter the type of tool to be mounted on the spindles of boring head, slots and aggregates in
the spindle configuration tables.
n Enter the type of tool or aggregate to be mounted in the tool racks of the magazines, for the
automatic tool change, in the magazine configuration tables.
n Mount the tools and the aggregates on the spindles and in the tool holders of the magazines.
n Configure the work table, according to the piece to be machined.
&DWDORJXLQJWRROVDQGDJJUHJDWHV
The cataloguing operation consists in recording the characteristics of tools and aggregates to be
used on the machine.
%RULQJXQLWWRROV
1. From the MANUAL page, select the Data menu and the Drill-b.Data option.
2. Access the Spindle Tools table and set the fields as described below:
N: not accessible. Indicates the number of the tool to be associated with the cataloguing
data.
St: Activation of the tool.

Select S to activate the tool (N if not active).
L: overhang of the tool from the nose of the spindle (see icon next to the table).
D: diameter of the tool (see icon next to the table).

(a207h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPLQJWRROLQJRSHUDWLRQV
Speed: rotation speed of the tool.
Type: type of tool (see icon next to the table).

Select Norm for blind bore, Lanc for through boring, N.l. for boring with diameter above
14 mm, Ctsk for tapered boring.
3. To save the data, select the Save menu.
7RROVIRUFROOHWVSLQGOHVDQGDJJUHJDWHV
1. From the MANUAL page, select the Data menu and the Drill-b. Data option.
2. Access the Router Tools table and set the fields as described below:
N: not accessible. Indicates the number of the tool to be associated with the cataloguing
data.
St: Activation of the tool.

Select S to activate the tool (N if not active).
L: overhang of the tool from the nose of the spindle (see icon next to the table).
D: diameter of the tool (see icon next to the table).
S: length of the cutting edge of the tool (see icon next to the table).
T: type of tool (see icon next to the table).

Select L for vertical cuts, F for routings and horizontal cuts.
Name: name of tool.
A: access to the set up of other technical data of the tool (see below).
Rot.sp.: rotation speed of the tool.
Max. sp.: maximum rotation speed of the tool.
Min. sp.: minimum rotation speed of the tool.
Acc time: ramp of acceleration of the tool.
Dec time: ramp of deceleration of the tool.
Rotation: direction of rotation of the tool.
Further t.cor: additional tool radius correction.

(a207h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
$JJUHJDWHV osX1
osY1
X Slot Y
Z Z
X
osY2
Y
osY1 0°
(SS) 2
osZ1 0° osZ1 0°
osZ2
osZ2
osZ2
az az
osX2 (SS) 1 ar
osX2 (SS) 1 (SS) 2 osY2 (SS) 1 (SS) 2 90°
osX2 osY2
1. From the MANUAL page select the Data menu and the Aggregate table.
2. Access the Aggregate table and set the fields as follows.
N: not accessible. Indicates the number of the aggregate to be associated with the
cataloguing data.
St: Activation of the aggregate.

Select S to activate the aggregate (N if not active).
Name: name of aggregate.
X: centre of rotation of the aggregate along axis X (osX1) in reference to the axis of the
slot. Enter zero (0) if on same axis.
Y: centre of rotation of the aggregate along axis Y (osY1) in reference to the axis of the
Z: centre of rotation of the aggregate along axis Z (osZ1) in reference to the axis of the
Type: type of operation performed by the aggregate.

Select BLADE for cuts, BOR. for borings, and ROUT. for routings.
Sm: Access to the set up data of the subspindles of the aggregate.
Minimum speed: minimum rotation speed of the subspindles of the aggregate.
Maximum speed: maximum rotation speed of the subspindles of the aggregate.
Trans report: transmission ratio of the aggregate (e.g. if the ratio is 1:1.5 enter 0.666).
N: not accessible. Indicates the number of the subspindle (SS) to be associated with the
configuration data.

(a207h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
St: Activation of the subspindle.

Select S to activate the subspindle (N if not active).
Name: name of tool mounted on subspindle.
Rot: direction of rotation of the subspindle
S: symmetrical subspindle. Indicates the subspindle that will be used if the program is
launched on the mirror origin. If there is no symmetrical subspindle, enter the subspindle
number, corresponding to the line number.
Q: access to the subspindle configuration data.
X: centre of rotation of subspindle along axis X (osX2) with reference to the centre of
rotation of the aggregate. If on the same axis enter zero (0).
Y: centre of rotation of subspindle along axis Y(osY2) with reference to the centre of
Z: centre of rotation of subspindle along axis Z(osZ2) with reference to the centre of
az: angle of the axis of rotation of the subspindle with plane X-Y.
ar: angle of the axis of rotation of the subspindle with axis X, on plane X-Y.
&RQILJXUDWLRQRIWKHERULQJXQLW
Used to define the arrangement of the spindles of the boring head.
1. From the MANUAL page select the Data menu and the Tooling option.
2. Access the Sp. tooling and set up the various fields as described below. If the table is not
displayed, select the Spin menu.
Spnd: Not accessible. Indicates the number of the boring head spindle to be associated
to the configuration data. (See icon near the table. When the cursor is scrolled through
the rows, the corresponding spindle is highlighted in red.)
Tool nb.: Number of mounted tool (corresponding to the line number in the Spindle Tools
table).
Sym: Symmetrical (or mirror) spindle. Indicates the spindle to be used if the program is
launched on the mirror origin.
Gr: Number of the relevant spindle group. A group is a set of spindles that can work
simultaneously.

(a207h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
A: not accessible. Indicates the spindle configuration characteristics.
3. To save the data, select the Files menu, the Spindles option, and Save.
4. Enter the name of the configuration in the File field (maximum 8 characters).
5. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation. The file is created and
assigned the extension .MND automatically
5HSODFLQJWKHFXUUHQWFRQILJXUDWLRQ
2. Select the Files menu, the Spindles option, and Open.
3. Select the name of the configuration to enable and press the ENTER key.
4. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation. The name of the configuration
is shown above the menu bar.
'HOHWLQJDFRQILJXUDWLRQ
2. Select the Files menu, the Spindles option, and Delete.
3. Select the name of the configuration to delete and press the ENTER key.
1. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation.
&RQILJXUDWLRQRIHOHFWURVSLQGOHVVORWV
This is used to define the arrangement of tools and/or aggregates on the electrospindles (slots).
2. Access the Rout. tooling table and set up the various fields as described below. If the table is
not displayed, select the Route menu.
Slot: Not accessible. Indicates the number of the slot to be associated to the
configuration data. (See icon near the table. When the cursor is scrolled through the
lines, the corresponding slot is highlighted in red.)
T. name: Name of mounted tool (corresponding to the name indicated in the Router
Tools table). To use automatic tool change, enter a point (“.”) on the second line only.

(a207h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
Sym: Symmetrical (or mirror) tool. Indicates the spindle to be used if the program is
launched on the mirror origin. If there are no mirror spindles, enter its own number,
corresponding to the number of the line.
Gr: Number of the relevant slot group. A group is a set of slots that can work
simultaneously.
A: not accessible. Indicates the slot configuration characteristics.
3. To save the data, select the Files menu, the Routers option, and Save.
4. Enter the name of the configuration in the File field (maximum 8 characters).
5. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation. The file is created and
assigned the extension .PNT automatically
5HSODFLQJWKHFXUUHQWFRQILJXUDWLRQ
2. Select the Files menu, the Routers option, and Open.
3. Select the name of the configuration to be enabled and press the ENTER key.
4. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation. The name of the configuration
is shown above the menu bar.
'HOHWLQJDFRQILJXUDWLRQ
2. Select the Files menu, the Routers option, and Delete.
3. Select the name of the configuration to be deleted and press the ENTER key.
&RQILJXUDWLRQRIWKHWRROPDJD]LQHV
Aggregates and tools to be used only for manual tool change must not be included in the
configuration of the magazine.
1. From the MANUAL page select the Data menu and the Magazines option.
2. In the Number field, enter the number of the magazine to configure (e.g.: 2, for the magazine
on the carriage).

(a207h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3. Access the Magazine Data table and set up the fields as indicated below.
N: not accessible. Indicates the number of the tool holder to be associated with the
configuration data.
A: Activation of the tool holder.

Select S to activate the tool holder (N if not active).
Tool name: name of tool or aggregate to be mounted in the tool holder.
P: presence of the tool or aggregate in the tool holder.

Select P if present, - not present.
Q: access permitted to the user only for reading the data.

Do not change the values set by BIESSE, to prevent problems during
automatic tool change.
Force: forced opening and positioning of the tool holder.

Select ON to start the operation, OFF to de-activate the operation.
:RUNLQJWDEOHVHWXS
Used to define and memorize the optimum position of the suction cups, stops and working tables
(objects) to ensure that they are not damaged during processing. Use the name also used for the
panel (program) to memorize the setup, to allow it to be displayed automatically during execution
and whenever the program is accessed.
Description of colours
The machine is shown in DARK BLUE, the tables in LIGHT BLUE, the stops in YELLOW, the
suction cups/jigs in RED, the panel dimensions in GREEN, and processes in WHITE. The
selected objects assume the colour WHITE.
Description of the menus
Files
For opening, saving, deleting or creating setups.
Move
For repeated modification of the position of an object (working tables, suction cups, stops) in the
drawing.
Copy
For copying and positioning the objects (working tables, suction cups, stops) in the drawing.
Del.
For deleting the objects (working tables, suction cups, stops) in the drawing.

(a207h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
Modif
For modifying the position of the objects (working tables, suction cups, stops) in the drawing.
Panel
For entering panels in and deleting them from the drawing, and producing mirror images of the
working tables and suction cups.
Setup
For modifying the grid in the graphic area. DX G sets the X axis grid interspace, DY G the Y axis
interspace and D the number of points in the grid to be jumped during rapid cursor movement.
Reset
For resetting the objects in the drawing.
Hide
For hiding the drawing of the machine.
M.Dat
For management of the machine data necessary for the setup.
Val.
For executing or deleting the position values of the objects (working tables, suction cups, stops)
present in the drawing.
6HWXSSURFHGXUH
1. From the MANUAL page, select the Edit menu and the Wrktbl.tool option.
2. Select the File menu, the Configuration option and Open. The name of the file to be selected
or opened is the same as the serial number of the machine.
3. To load the panel to be processed, select the Panel menu, the New panel option and the
name.
4. Set the Origin field on the point of origin to be used for positioning the panel.
5. To set the position of the objects, select the Move menu and the option corresponding to the
object.
6. Select the object (the selection can be moved to other objects using the CURSOR keys) and
press the ENTER key to confirm.
7. Use the CURSOR keys to locate the object in the desired point and press the ENTER key.
To locate the objects in a new area in a mirror image of their initial position, proceed as follows.
8. Add the same panel on the point of origin desired, by selecting the Panel menu, the New
Panel option and the name.
9. Set the Origin field on the point of origin to be used for positioning the panel.

(a207h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
10. Select the Panel menu and the Planestop Mirror ( option, and set the source point of origin
and the destination origin, only if there are more than two panels present.
11. To save the setup, select the Files menu, the Tooling option and Save. Check that the name
is the same as that of the panel recalled and confirm with OK to save.
6HWWLQJVHWXSSRVLWLRQYDOXHV
To display the values, select the Val. menu (SHIFT-MENU key to display) and the option desired:
Tooling value to set the position values of all the objects in the setup or Plane value to set the
positions of the working tables only, or Stop value to set the positions of the suction cups only.
The values are not saved with the setup, so to display the setting carry out this procedure
whenever the function is accessed.
To delete the value setting, select the Val menu and the Delete Values option.

(a207h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU

(a207h002.fm-250200)
3DUW3URJUDPPLQJPDFKLQLQJRSHUDWLRQV

(a305h001.fm-250200)
(a305h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
ation of a file (.PAN) known as a “program”, containing the data on machining operations to be
performed by the machine on the piece. Furthermore, to optimise the machine’s work it is possible
to create a file known as a “work list” containing the names of the programs and the relative
numbers of pieces to be machined.
3URJUDPPDEOHPDFKLQLQJRSHUDWLRQV
It is possible to program boring, milling and cutting operations. The machining operations can be
either vertical or horizontal, with respect to the piece resting on the work table.
3URJUDPPDEOHERULQJRSHUDWLRQV
Boring operations can be programmed in one of two ways, “optimised” and “non optimised”.
“Optimised” boring operations are only carried out with the boring unit spindles. In this type of
programming the operator sets the boring data (diameter, type of bit, etc.), using which the NC
carries out an automatic search in the boring head configuration to find suitable tools. As a result
of this the NC selects, from the spindles that have been identified as having suitable tools, which
one is to be used and the route to be followed to optimise machining times.
“Non optimised” boring operations can be carried out with the boring head spindles, with special
aggregates, and optionally with collet spindles. In this type of programming the operator sets the
boring data and selects the spindles, aggregates or electrospindles/slots to be used for the
machining operation.
The following shows the boring operations.
n Vertical and horizontal straight line boring: carried out with the boring unit spindle tools or with
the tool on an electrospindle/slot.

(a210h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
n Vertical and horizontal angled straight line boring: carried out with the boring unit spindle tools
or with the tool on an electrospindle/slot.
n Vertical circumference boring: carried out with the boring unit spindle tools or with the tool on
an electrospindle/slot.
n Vertical and horizontal boring using a macro: carried out with the boring unit spindle tools.
There are 10 macros available:
macro BSM1 gives a system 32 vertical boring operation centred on the piece;
=
macro BSM2 gives a system 32 vertical boring operation with fixed starting value;

(a210h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
macro BSM3 gives a vertical assembly boring operation;
macro BSM4 gives a horizontal assembly boring operation;
macro BSM5 gives a vertical hinge slot boring operation;
macro BSM6 gives a vertical boring operation for application of a “cross” hinge mounting
plate;
macro BSM7 gives a vertical boring operation for application of a “straight” hinge mounting
plate;
macros BSM8, BSM9, BSM10 are empty and available to be used by the operator.

(a210h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
3URJUDPPDEOHPLOOLQJRSHUDWLRQV
The milling operations are programmed using macros, and they are performed using the tools
fitted on the collet spindles or aggregates installed on the electrospindles. The various type of
programmable milling operation are shown below.
n Milling of geometrical figures and elements.
n Milling of profiles.
n Milling operations for assembly of 90° tops.

(a210h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
3URJUDPPDEOHFXWWLQJRSHUDWLRQV
It is possible to program vertical cuts along the X or Y axis. The cuts are carried out using the
special tool fitted on an electrospindle/slot.
Y+ X+
Z+
5HSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKHSLHFH
During programming a drawing of the piece to be machined is shown on screen. The drawing
contains numbers indicating the sides and corners of the piece.
Side number 5 refers to the top part of the piece resting on the work table. Corner number 1 is the
corner formed by the left hand side and the rear side of the piece resting on the work table.
corner number
side number

(a210h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
Example
In the following figure number 5 indicates the side to be machined, therefore the working depth
zero (prf); 1 indicates the reference corner for the working positions (X, Y offset).
Y X
Z
0 zero
prf
offset Y
offset X
Width
Length
Thickness
prf
0HDVXUHPHQWRIFRUQHUV
(-)
0° (zero)
(+)

(a210h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ
*HQHUDOSURJUDPPLQJRSHUDWLRQVWREHSHUIRUPHG
The following information has the aim of providing the operator with a general view of the
operations to be performed during programming. The various stages of programming are indicated
below.
1. List all the tools and aggregates to be used in the program.
2. Design a profile, that is to say create a drawing to which the machine must refer when milling
the piece. If the profile has to be imported into the program it is possible to design it using
PRF, DXF or CID format. Otherwise, it can be designed in EGA directly within the program
itself.
3. Create a program (PAN file) and set the required machining operations. This stage also
includes EGA design or import of a profile.
4. Create and enable the configurations for the boring unit spindles and for the electrospindles
(slots).
5. Check that the set data is correct and that machining operations are feasible, by simulation of
the program.

(a210h002.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
1RWHVRQSURJUDPPLQJ

(a210h002.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 'UDZLQJSURILOHVLQ35)IRUPDW
This part of the programming operations is carried out on the CAD page, and consists in creating a
two-dimensional figure, necessarily containing parameters, known as a “profile”. The profile forms
the trajectory to be used to machine the piece.
Creation of the profile takes place in two phases: the first phase consists in creating the base
drawing (A) from which, during the second phase, the profile is obtained by tracing over either part
or the whole of the base drawing (B).
A B
L8 L4 L3 L8 L4 L3
L7 P2 L7 P2
C6 C6
L5 L5
P1 P1
If the geometrical information available is insufficient, it is possible to create the profile by joining
up points (D). Using this method the base drawing is made up of a series of points (dots) (C), so
that it is necessary to draw a great many to make the profile as exact as possible.
C D
P0 P0
P1 P1
P2 P2
P3 P3
P4 P10 P4 P10
P9 P9
P11 P11
P5 P8 P5 P8
P6 P7 P12 P6 P7 P12
The profile can be “closed”, when the last element joins the first one, or “open”, when the last
element does not join the first one. Each profile created is saved and stored in the CAD library,
with the extension .PRF, and is available to create a program.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'UDZLQJSURILOHVLQ35)IRUPDW
,QIRUPDWLRQRQWKH&$'SDJHJUDSKLFVDUHD
The following figure illustrates an example of the entities that can be displayed in the CAD page
graphics area.
A B C D F
E
X+ L3
L4
P2
Y+
C6
L5 P7
P1
H K L J
A Reference panel origin.
B Cursor.
C Grid point.
D Profile.
E Edge of reference panel.
F Base element label.
G Profile element.
H “Line” type base element.
J “Circle” type base element.
K “Point” type base element.
L Indication of the direction of movement of the tool along the profile.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
%DVHHOHPHQWODEHOV
These labels are made up of a letter and a number. The letter identifies the type of base element.
Letter “C” identifies a CIRCLE.
Letter “L” identifies a LINE.
Letter “P” identifies a POINT.
The number indicates the order in which the elements were drawn.
Example: let us suppose that the first element drawn is a circle, the second a point, the
third a line, the fourth another circle, the fifth another line, etc..
The first element will be labelled C1, the second P2, the third L3, the fourth C4, the fifth
L5, etc..
&RORXUVRIGUDZLQJHOHPHQWV
The following describes the colours used in the graphics area, according to the design phase.
In normal conditions:
Green = base elements.

Yellow = labels.
Dark blue = temporary multiple solutions.
During selection of the elements:
Dark blue = possibly selectable elements.

White = selected elements.
During creation of the profile:
Light blue = profile or part of profile created.

White = current element.
Red = multiple solutions (points or curves).
During selection of the profiles:
Dark blue = possibly selectable profiles.

Red = selected profile.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3RSXSILHOGV
The following figure illustrates the types of field that can be found in the popups.
Numerical field
Command fields
/,1(
&DOF '()
/,1(
2N
5$',86
'HO
62/87 62/
Solution field
Command fields: allow the following functions to be performed.
Ok to confirm the operation and exit.
Del to cancel the operation.
Calc to repeat the calculations proposed in the solutions.
DEF to open the popup containing the default data for the element. Press ENTER on the
Ok field to exit the popup, dissolving the relationship bond that exists between the
elements, or alternatively press ENTER on the field Del to exit without dissolving the
relationship bond; for information on relationship bonds between elements, please see
the paragraph “Information on the relationship bond between base elements”.
Numerical fields: these are used to indicate dimensions, co-ordinates, label numbers, etc.,
relating to the base elements selected or to be included in the drawing.
Solution fields: these contain a preset number of geometrical solutions, also known as
“temporary multiple solutions”, which can be scrolled through using a numerical key. Press ENTER
to confirm selection.
/,1(
&DOF '()
/,1(
2N
5$',86
'HO L1
62/87 62/
C3
L2
/,1(
&DOF '()
C3 /,1(
2N
5$',86
'HO
62/87 62/

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
0RYLQJWKHRSHQSRSXS
If the open popup is overlapping the part of the drawing of interest to the user, it can be moved to
the four corners of the graphics area by selecting the menu Move.
6HOHFWLQJWKHEDVHHOHPHQWV
Position the cursor on the element required and press ENTER; the selected element will turn
white. If it turns dark blue the arrow keys can be used to transfer selection onto other elements,
which will also turn dark blue during selection; press ENTER to confirm the choice of element,
which will then turn white.
6HOHFWLQJSURILOHHOHPHQWV
When a panel contains more than one profile and the user requests any operation on them (copy,
move, delete, compensation, etc.), it is necessary to select the profile on which the operation is to
be carried out. To select a profile, position the cursor on one of its elements (curve or segment)
and press ENTER; the selected profile will turn red. If it turns dark blue the arrow keys can be used
to transfer selection onto other elements, which will also turn dark blue during selection; press
ENTER to confirm the choice of element, which will then turn red.
&$'VHWXS
Allows the characteristics of the graphics area, the panel and the file type to be set.
1. Select the menu Menu and the option Setup CAD, to access setting of the fields as described
below.
X GRID: distance between points on the grid, in the X axis direction.
XGRIGLIA

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
Y GRID: distance between points on the grid, in the Y axis direction.
YGRIGLIA
DELTA: number of grid points for rapid cursor movement, obtained by pressing the
SHIFT key with one of the cursor keys on the command unit.
TEXT DRW: displays the labels for the base elements. Select TEXT to display the labels,
or NO TEXT to hide the labels.
TEXT NO TEXT
L8 L4 L3
L7 P2
C6
L5
P1
MODIFY: activates the “relationship bond” between base elements, for automatic
updating during modification of one of their parent elements. Select MOD.ON to activate
the bond, or MOD.OFF to deactivate the bond.
CONNECT: execution of connecting sections during shaping between elements which

are not at a tangent to each other, but which intersect at an angle smaller than the angle
indicated in ANG below. Select CON_YE to create the connecting sections, or
CONN_No not to create them.
EXTENSIO: extension to be used to define the type (format) of file when saving. Select
.PRF to save the file as a profile, .MCR to save the file as a macro for milling (with name
MF*.MCR; *=number from 1 to 20), .DIS to save the file as a drawing to be used during
tooling of the work table.
MAX RAD: maximum value permitted for the radius (r) of the curve (calculated
automatically) which links two successive points, during creation of the profile by linking

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
of points; if the radius of the curve passing through the points exceeds this value, the
curve will automatically be replaced by a straight line.
P2
P1 r
r
r
P3
r
P0
P4
ANGLE: value of the angle (a) for the creation of connections (see CONNECTIONS
above). If the angle formed by the two tangents in the point of intersection P is less than
this value, the two elements are considered tangents.
P a P
a
P P
a
RAD.IN-OUT: radius (r) for the connecting section to be used during lead-in and lead-out;
this value must be adapted to suit the dimensions of the profile and the radius of the tool
to be used.
r r

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
&UHDWLQJWKHUHIHUHQFHSDQHO
In CAD, the term “reference panel” is used to indicate the main zone of the graphics area. Every
time the NC is turned on, it is possible to start drawing on the panel in an unnamed file
“noname00.PRF”. To change the dimensions of the panel, proceed as described below, otherwise
perform the CAD setup and then create the base drawing.
1. Select the menu Files and the option New.
2. Press ENTER on the Yes field to access setting of the fields, as follows.
DIM X: dimensions of the panel in the X axis direction.
DIM Y: dimensions of the panel in the Y axis direction.
DIM Z: dimensions of the panel in the Z axis direction.
DIM X
DIM Y
3. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the setting.
&UHDWLQJWKHEDVHGUDZLQJ
The base elements which may make up the drawing are of three types: points, (straight) lines and
circles. Before creating the drawing, users are advised to make a draft or analyse the profile to find
out which and how many base elements will have to be drawn, and their respective co-ordinates
and dimensions.
Information on the relationship bond between base elements
If an element is created using other elements already present in the drawing, a bond is
created (the elements involved are said to have a “relationship” with each other). The
bond is memorised and allows the user to transmit modifications from “parent” to “child”
elements. To enable this function, please consult the description of the MODIFY field in
paragraph 13.2 “CAD setup”.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
Example: create a circle C3 at a tangent to two circles C1 and C2 already drawn; when
the position of C2 (a parent element) is modified, the position of C3 (a child element) will
also be modified automatically.
C2
C3
C3
C1 C2 C1 C2
Each drawing can be made up of a maximum of 100 base elements. Before starting the drawing,
setup CAD as described in paragraph 13.2 “CAD setup”. To draw base elements, proceed as
follows.
1. Select the menu Menu and the option Drawing.
2. Select the option, Point to draw a “point” type element, Line to draw a “line” type element,
Circle to draw a “circle” type element.
3. Select the command desired (the name will appear under the last row of icons in the open
popup) and press ENTER to access the setup function, as described in paragraph 13.5
“Description of drawing commands”. To set the parameters of the elements drawn, please
refer to paragraph 13.6 “Setting the parameters of the base drawing”.
4. When the base drawing is complete, save it by selecting the menu Files and the option Save.
5. Type the name (maximum 8 characters) in the field File, then press ENTER on the OK field; a
file with the extension set during CAD setup will automatically be created.
'HVFULSWLRQRIGUDZLQJFRPPDQGV
The following is a description of the commands available when drawing base elements.
3RLQWFRPPDQG
The following are the commands available to create a “point” type geometrical element.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
&DUWHVLDQ&RRUGLQDWHV
Creates a point by means of the grid or the cartesian co-ordinates. Select a point on the grid and
press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the X and Y cartesian co-ordinates of the point
to be created.
Y X
P1
3RODU&RRUGLQDWHV
Creates a point by means of the polar co-ordinates. Select a point on the grid and press ENTER.
In the popup it is possible to modify the angle in relation to the X axis of the imaginary straight line
on which the point to be created lies, and the distance of the point from the origin of the cartesian
axes.
ANG
DELT
P1
/LQHOLQHLQWHUVHFWLRQ
Creates a point from the intersection of two lines. Select two lines (e.g.: L1, L3) and press ENTER.
In the popup it is possible to modify the numbers in the element labels (e.g.: first line = L2, second
line = L3). The point created (e.g.: P4) is the intersection of the two lines.
L1
P4
LIN2= L3 LIN1= L2

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
/LQHFLUFOHLQWHUVHFWLRQ
Creates a point from the intersection of a line with a circle. Select a line and a circle, then press
ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the numbers in the element labels. If the line
intersects the circle, the user must select which of the two alternatives is required. The point
created (e.g.: P3) is the intersection of the line and the circle.
LIN= L1
P3
CER= C2
&LUFOHFLUFOHLQWHUVHFW
Creates a point from the intersection of two circles. Select the two circles (e.g.: C1, C2) and press
ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the numbers in the element labels (e.g.: first circle =
C1, second circle = C3). If the two circles intersect each other, the user must select which of the
two alternatives is required. The point created (e.g.: P4) is the intersection of the two circles.
CER2= C2
CER1= C1
C3
P4
3RLQWFHQWUHFLUFOH
Creates a point at the centre of a circle. Select the circle and press ENTER. In the popup it is
possible to modify the number in the circle label. The point created has the same co-ordinates as
the centre of the circle.
CER1= C1
P2

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
/LQHFRPPDQG
The following are the commands available to create a “line” type geometrical element.
7KURXJK;<SDLUV
Creates a line passing through two points on the grid. Select the two points on the grid through
which the line to be created is to pass and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the
X and Y co-ordinates for the two points through which the line passes.
X2
X1
Y1
Y2
L1
7KURXJKWZRNQRZQSRLQWV
Creates a line passing through two known points. Select the two points (e.g.: P1, P2) through
which the line to be created is to pass and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the
numbers in the labels for the points through which the line passes (e.g.: first point = P1, second
point = P3).
PTO2= P3
PTO1= P1
L4
P2
7KURXJK;<SZLWKDQJOH
Creates a line passing through a point on the grid with an angle referred to the X axis. Select a
point on the grid through which the line to be created is to pass, and press ENTER; then use the
cursor keys to select the angle of the line and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
the X and Y co-ordinates for the point through which the line passes and its angle with respect to
the X axis.
ANG
L1
7KUNQRZQSRLQWZDQJOH
Creates a line passing through a known point with an angle referred to the X axis. Select the point
through which the line to be created is to pass, and press ENTER; then use the cursor keys to
select the angle of the line and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the label
number for the point through which the line passes and its angle with respect to the X axis.
ANG
PTO= P1
L2
3DUDOOHOWRNQRZQOLQH
Creates a line parallel to a known line. Select the reference line for the parallel line to be created
and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the label number for the reference line and
the distance between the two lines. Select which of the two alternatives is desired.
DIST
LIN= L1 L2

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
&LUFOHWDQJWKURXJKSRLQ
Creates a line passing through a known point and at a tangent to a circle (the point must always be
outside the circle). Select a known point through which the line is to pass and press ENTER; then
select the circle to which the line to be created is to be at a tangent and press ENTER. In the
popup it is possible to modify the label number for the circle and the label number for the point.
Select which of the two possible alternatives is required. The line obtained is at a tangent to the
circle and passes through the point.
L3
PTO= P1
CER= C2
7DQJHQWNQRZQFLUFOHV
Creates a line at a tangent to two circles. Select the two circles and press ENTER. In the popup it
is possible to modify the label numbers for the circles. In the most general case there are 4
different solutions to be chosen from. The line obtained is at a tangent to both circles.
L3
CER1= C1
CER2= C2
3HUSOLQHWKURXJKSRLQW
Creates a line passing through a known point and perpendicular to a line. Select the point and the
line, then press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the label number for the line and the
point. The line obtained is perpendicular to the chosen line and passes through the point.
L3
LIN= L2
PTO= P1 90°

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
&LUFOHWDQJZLWKDQJOH
Creates a line at a tangent to a circle at a specified angle to the X axis. Select the circle and a point
on the grid to determine the angle, then press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the
label numbers for the tangent circle and the angle of the line to be obtained. Select which of the
two alternatives is required.
L2
ANG
CER= C1
3DUDOOHOWRDQD[LV
Creates a line parallel to one side of the profile panel (e.g.: LINE = L1). Select the side and press
ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the distance between the line and the side of the
panel.
LIN= L4
L1
DIST
LIN= L1
LIN= L3
LIN= L2
&LUFOHFRPPDQG
The following are the commands available to create a “circle” type geometrical element.
%\;<FHQWUHDQGUDGLXV
Creates a circle by means of the grid and the cartesian co-ordinates. Select a first point on the grid
for the centre of the circle to be created, and press ENTER; then select a second point on the grid

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
for the radius of the circle and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the X and Y
co-ordinates for the centre and the value of the radius.
XC
YC
C1
RAG
%\;<FHQWUH;<SRLQW
Creates a circle by means of two points on the grid, the first for the centre of the circle and the
second to indicate passage of the circumference. Select the two points on the grid and press
ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the X and Y co-ordinates for the two points.
X
XC
YC
Y
C1
%\NQRZQFHQWUHUDGLXV
Creates a circle by means of a known point and a point on the grid, the first for the centre of the
circle and the second for the radius. Select the two points on the grid and press ENTER. In the
popup it is possible to modify the label number for the known point and the value of the radius.
C2
RAG
PTO= P1

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
%\NQRZQSRLQWVUDGLXV
Creates a circle passing through two known points with a known radius. Select the two known
points and set the value of the radius approximately using a point on the grid, then press ENTER.
In the popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for the known points and the value of the
radius. Select which of the two alternatives is required.
PTO1= P1
C3
RAG
PTO2= P2
%\NQRZQSRLQWV
Creates a circle passing through three known points. Select the three known points through which
the circle has to pass and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for
the known points.
PTO2= P2
C4
PTO1= P1
PTO3= P3
&RQFHQWULFWRFLUFOH
Creates a circle concentric to a known circle. Select the known circle and a point on the grid to give
the distance between the two circumferences, then press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to
modify the label numbers for the circle and the distance between circumferences. Select which of
the two alternatives is required (inside or outside the known circle).
C2
DIST
CER= C1

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
7DQJHQWNQRZQOLQHV
Creates a circle at a tangent to two intersecting lines. Select the two lines and press ENTER. In the
popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for the elements and the value of the circle radius.
Select which of the 4 possible geometrical solutions is required. A circle at a tangent to the lines is
obtained.
LIN2= L2
C3
RAG
LIN1= L1
7DQJHQWNQRZQFLUFOHV
Creates a circle at a tangent to two circles. Select the two circles and press ENTER. In the popup
it is possible to modify the label numbers for the elements and the value of the radius for the circle
to be created. In the most general case there are 8 different solutions to be chosen from. A circle
at a tangent to the two circles is obtained (e.g.: C3).
CER1= C2
RAG
CER1= C1 C3
&LUFOHOLQHWDQJHQW
Creates a circle at a tangent to a line and a circle. Select the line and the circle and press ENTER.
In the popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for the elements and the value of the radius
for the circle to be created. In the most general case there are 8 different solutions to be chosen
from. A circle at a tangent to the line and the circle is obtained (e.g.: C3).
LIN= L1
C3
CER= C2 RAG

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
7DQJHQWFLUFOHWKURXJKSQW
Creates a circle passing through a known point and at a tangent to a circle. Select the known point,
the circle and a point on the grid for the radius of the circle to be created, then press ENTER. In the
popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for the elements and the value of the circle radius.
Select which of the two possible solutions is required. The circle obtained passes through the
known point and is at a tangent to the circle (e.g.: C3).
C3
RAG
PTO= P1 CER= C2
%\;<SDLUDQGSRLQW
Creates a circle using a point on the grid and a known point, the first being the centre of the circle
and the second being the radius. Select the two points and press ENTER. In the popup it is
possible to modify the co-ordinates of the centre of the circle and the label number for the known
point.
XC
YC
C2
PTO= P1

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
%\3FHQWUHDQG3
Creates a circle using two known points, the first being the centre of the circle and the second
being the radius. Select the two known points and press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to
modify the label numbers for the known points.
PTO= P2
CENTRO= P1
C3
)RU3FHQWUHFLUFOHWJ
Creates a circle with its centre on a known point and at a tangent to a circle. Select the known
point and the circle, then press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for
the elements and select the solution required.
CERCHIO= C2
PUNTO= P1
C3
/LQHWDQJWKURXJKSW
Creates a circle passing through a known point and at a tangent to a line. Select the known point
and the line, then press ENTER. In the popup it is possible to modify the label numbers for the
elements, the value of the radius to be created, and select the solution required.
PUNTO= P1
LINEA= L2
C3

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
6HWWLQJWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIWKHEDVHGUDZLQJ
Setting the parameters of the base drawing consists in adapting the profile obtained from this
drawing to suit the dimensions of the program panel. This adaptation is carried out during milling
programming, by setting the parameters present, and it may be of two types, “total” or “partial”. In
both cases it might be necessary to define one or more conditions that have to be complied with
during application of the profile.
Parameter setting with total adaptation allows the profile to be applied to any panel, without having
to set the parameters, but in accordance with the conditions present.
Parameter setting with partial adaptation allows the profile to be applied to any panel, but the
parameters can be set to vary the profile, providing the conditions are complied with.
To set the parameters for a drawing it is necessary to create parameters with associated values,
which may also be the solution of an algebraic expression, and apply them when drawing the base
elements.
The parameters are created in the specific table, which can be accessed by selecting the TabPar
menu. By default, the parameters table contains the main parameters relating to dimensions of the
panel (X=length, Y=width, Z=thickness). Each line in the table can only contain a single parameter,
and is made up of two fields: the one on the left contains the name and the one on the right
contains the value, or an algebraic expression.
Writing algebraic expressions
As well as the normal alphanumeric characters, the NC algebraic evaluator also accepts
the following calculation characters:
%(x) = calculation of the whole part of the value x;

$(x) = calculation of the sine of x;
@(x) = calculation of the cosine of x;
^(x) = calculation of the square root of x.
0RGLI\LQJWKHEDVHGUDZLQJ
To modify the base drawing, the individual elements which make it up must be modified, as
described below.
0RGLI\LQJEDVHHOHPHQWV
1. Select the menu ModEle.
2. Select the element to be modified. Before making the modification, please see the paragraph
13.1 “Information on the CAD page graphics area”; then modify the element. To modify the
values of any parameters used to set the element, select the menu TabPar and change the
value of the parameter involved.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3. Check that the effect obtained is the one desired, after which save the drawing by selecting
the menu Files and the option Save.
4. Press ENTER on the OK field, to confirm saving with the same file name.
&RS\LQJEDVHHOHPHQWV
1. Select the menu Menu, then the option Drawing element and Copy elements.
2. Select the elements to be copied; after completing the selection press BS.
3. In the open popup, set the shift co-ordinates. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the
operation.
4. The “copy” mode remains active, allowing other copies to be made of the selected elements.
On completing the operation, press ESC to exit the mode.
ORIG X ORIG X
ORIG Y
C0 C0
ORIG Y
C1
0RYLQJEDVHHOHPHQWV
1. Select the menu Menu, then the option Drawing element and Move elements.
2. Select the elements to be moved; after completing the selection press BS.
3. In the open popup, set the shift co-ordinates. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the
operation.
4. The move mode remains active, allowing further movement of the selected elements. On
completing the operation, press ESC to exit the mode.
ORIG X ORIG X
ORIG Y
C0
ORIG Y
C0

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
'HOHWLQJEDVHHOHPHQWV
If elements used to create a profile are deleted, the profile is released from its bond with the
remaining elements and becomes independent; this means that it will no longer be possible to
modify the profile by means of the base elements.
1. Select the menu DelEle and the elements to be deleted.
2. Press BS to delete the selected elements; the system also exits delete mode automatically.
'HOHWLQJWKHZKROHEDVHGUDZLQJ
1. Select the menu Menu and the option Delete drawing.
2. Press ENTER to confirm deletion.
5RWDWLQJWKHEDVHGUDZLQJ
When this operation is carried out the original parameters are lost, and everything which has been
created in the CAD graphics area, including the profile, will be included in the rotation.
1. Select the menu Menu, then the option Drawing and Rotate drawing.
2. In the first popup that appears, set the co-ordinates for the central point of rotation and press
ENTER to confirm.
3. In the second popup that appears, set the angle of rotation in the ANGLE field, and press
ENTER to confirm and activate rotation mode. The popup remains open for further settings of
the angle of rotation; to rotate in a “clockwise” direction, type in a positive value, whereas to
rotate in an “anticlockwise” direction type in a negative value.
4. To exit from rotation mode, press ESC.
&UHDWLQJDSURILOHE\WUDFLQJRYHUHOHPHQWV
The profile must always start with a point and end with a point; the two may or may not coincide. It
is not necessary to have a “point” type element on the drawing exactly where the profile starts. The
user can exit the procedure at any time during creation of a profile, by pressing ESC; when
returning to the procedure, creation of the profile will continue from the point where it was
interrupted. To end tracing operations and obtain the profile, the user must establish the final point
(finishing point of the profile), otherwise it cannot be saved. Before proceeding, please refer to
paragraph 13.1 “Information on the CAD page graphics area”.
To trace over the elements, proceed as follows.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
1. Select the menu InsPro; or select the menu Menu, then the option Profile and Create new
profile.
2. Set the point at which the tracing process is to start (starting point of the profile); there are two
ways of doing this.
In the first method, select a “point” type element, which must coincide with the base
element which will allow the first element in the profile to be obtained.
In the second method, as it is not possible to select a “point” type element, select another
type of element, a “line” or “circle”. A dark blue line appears on the selected element in
correspondence with the cursor; using the cursor keys, position the line vertically or
horizontally and press ENTER (the line becomes PURPLE). Move the line (using the
cursor keys) over the selected element (coloured white) to establish the starting point of
the tracing process (starting point of the profile) on the intersection of the two, and press
ENTER; in the popup it is possible to modify the co-ordinates of the starting point, or
merely to confirm the operation by pressing ENTER on the Ok field.
3. Once the starting point has been defined, trace over all the elements required to create the
profile. To abort the latest operation carried out during tracing operations, please see the
paragraph 13.11 “Deleting the last profile element created”.
Move the cursor to select the next element and press ENTER; the selected element is
coloured white, whereas the part of the profile created is coloured light blue. The only
condition imposed when selecting the next elements is that they must intersect the
previous element. Every time the next element from the current one is selected, any
multiple intersections are displayed (if there are any), and they can be displayed in
sequence by pressing the cursor keys; choose the solution required by pressing ENTER.
If there is only one intersection between the current element and the next one it will
automatically be taken as the end point of the previous segment or curve and the starting
point of the current one. The same also applies when selecting the section of curve to be
traced over; the two paths are displayed in sequence by pressing the cursor keys. Press
ENTER to select the path required.
4. To end the tracing process, the user must set the tracing end point (final point of the profile). If
the point selected is the same one used for the starting point the resulting profile will be of the
“closed” type, otherwise, if it is a different point, the profile will be of the “open” type. There are
three ways of setting the final point.
In the first method, the user must select a “point” type element. This point will
automatically be used as the end point of the profile.
In the second method, as it is not possible to select a “point” type element, press BS and
close the profile automatically by pressing DEL, ignoring the dark blue line that appears
on the cursor.
In the third method, press BS. A dark blue line appears in correspondence with the
cursor; using the cursor keys, position the line vertically or horizontally and press ENTER
(the line becomes PURPLE). Move the line (using the cursor keys) over the selected
element (coloured white) to establish the end point of the tracing process (final point of
the profile) on the intersection of the two, and press ENTER; in the popup it is possible to
modify the co-ordinates of the end point, or merely to confirm the operation by pressing
ENTER on the Ok field.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
5. When the tracing operation is complete, save the profile obtained by selecting the menu Files
and the option Save.
file with the extensions set during CAD setup operations will be created automatically. If the
file is to be saved with the previous name, simply press ENTER on the OK field.
'HOHWLQJWKHODVWSURILOHHOHPHQWFUHDWHG
During creation of the profile it is possible to delete the last element created in sequence, until the
whole profile is eliminated.
This function is activated during creation of the profile, by pressing the ALT + U keys together;
alternatively select the menu Menu and the options Profile Elem and Delete Element. The option is
deactivated when the profile is finished.
&UHDWLQJWKHSURILOHE\MRLQLQJXSSRLQWV
The profile is calculated and created automatically, based on all the “point” type elements present
in the base drawing. The direction of the profile is determined by the sequential order in which the
points were drawn. To define the type of line used to join the points, please see the description of
the RADIUS field in paragraph 13.2 “CAD setup”.
To join up the points, proceed as follows.
1. Select the menu Menu and the option Profile.
2. Select the option Profile Utilities and Profile by points.
3. In the open popup, set the type of profile required, selecting CLOSED PROFILE or OPEN
PROFILE.
CLOSED PROFILE OPEN PROFILE

P0 P0
P1 P1
P2 P2
P3 P3
P4 P10 P4 P10
P9 P9
P5 P8 P11 P5 P8 P11
P6 P7 P12 P6 P7 P12
4. When this operation is complete, save the profile obtained by selecting the menu Files and
the option Save.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
file with the extension set during CAD setup operations will be created automatically. If the file
is to be saved with the previous name, simply press ENTER on the OK field.
+LJKOLJKWHGGLVSOD\RISURILOH
This type of display consists in hiding the base drawing, so that only the profile is displayed. This
display mode should only be activated when the profile had been completed, allowing the user to
see clearly whether any errors have been made in selection of the elements during tracing. Return
to full display mode immediately afterwards. If this is not done, whenever another profile (file) is
opened, the display will be incomplete and the operator may become confused as to the actual
situation of the profile.
This display mode is activated by pressing ALT + N or by selecting the menu Menu and the options
DrawingElem and Hide/display Drawing.
To return to full display, press ATL + N again.
3URFHGXUHVRQWKHSURILOH
After creating the profile it can be completed with applications that modify its structure (such as
connecting sections, bevels, etc.) or specify applicability during programming (lead-in type,
lead-out type, etc.). The following is a list of the applications that can be performed on the profile.
,QVHUWLQJFRQQHFWLQJVHFWLRQV
2. Select the option Connect+ Round. and the command Connection profile elem. If several
profiles are present, select the one on which to operate.
3. Select the two elements to be connected; set the radius of the connecting section in the
RADIUS field of the open popup, and press ENTER in the Ok field.
4. Press ESC to exit the mode.
,QVHUWLQJEHYHOV
2. Select the option Connect+ Round. and the command Rounding profile element
3. If several profiles are present, select the one on which to operate.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
4. Select the two elements to be bevelled; set the distance of the bevel from the point of
intersection of the selected lines in the DISTANCE field of the open popup and press ENTER
in the Ok field.
,QVHUWLQJWKHWRROOHDGLQ
1. Select the menu InsI_O; or select the menu Menu, the option Profile and the option In and
Out.
2. Select the option Lead-in only.
4. Select the element on which the lead-in is to be inserted; the element becomes white in
colour.
5. Press a cursor key to position the dark blue line horizontally or vertically above the selected
element, establishing the insertion point at the point of intersection of the two.
6. After establishing the point of intersection, press ENTER; in the open popup it is possible to
modify the offset co-ordinates or confirm the operation by pressing ENTER on the Ok field.
7. Use the cursor keys to select the inside or outside of the profile and press ENTER.
,QVHUWLQJWKHWRROOHDGRXW
Out.
2. Select the option Lead-out only.
4. Select the element on which the lead-out is to be inserted; the element becomes white in
colour.
7. Use the cursor keys to select the inside or outside of the profile and press ENTER.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
,QVHUWLQJWKHWRROOHDGLQDQGOHDGRXWVLPXOWDQHRXVO\
Out.
2. Select the option Manual In and Out.
3. Set the distance between the lead-in and the lead-out in the DELTA field in the open popup.
5. Select the element on which the lead-in and lead-out are to be inserted; the element becomes
white in colour.
8. Use the cursor keys to select the inside or outside of the profile and press ENTER to insert
the lead-in, then repeat selection to insert the lead-out.
,QVHUWLQJWKHWRROOHDGLQDQGRUOHDGRXWDXWRPDWLFDOO\
Out.
2. Select the option Automatic In and Out.
3. Set the type of lead-in and lead-out (see popup icon) in the DIRECT. field of the open popup,
set whether lead-in only, lead-out only or both are to be entered in the TYPE field, set the
distance between the lead-in and the lead-out in the DELTA field; press ENTER on the Ok
field to confirm the operation.
4. If several profiles are present, select the one on which to operate. If one of the selected
profiles is open, the lead-in and lead-out will be inserted on the first and last element,
respectively.
6HWWLQJWKHZRUNLQJGHSWKRQWKHHOHPHQWV
In this function, the user sets the depth of the starting and end point for the elements making up
the profile. During use of the profile for programming, this setting will be added to the value set in
the Depth field (described on page 5-38).
1. Select the menu InsPro; or select the menu Menu, the option Profile element and Modify
depth.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3. Select the element of the profile on which the working depth is to be set, and set the fields as
described below. Repeat setting procedures on the elements required.
Z BEG: depth of the starting point, with respect to the surface of the panel to be
machined.
Z END: depth of the end point, with respect to the surface of the panel to be machined.
X Y Z
Z INI
Z FIN
4. When the operation is complete, press ESC to terminate settings and save the profile by
selecting the menu Files and the option Save.
file with the extension set during CAD setup operations will be created automatically. If the file
is to be saved with the previous name, simply press ENTER on the OK field.
%UHDNLQJXSWKHHOHPHQWV
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile element and Break profile el. up
3. Select the element to be broken up; the element becomes white in colour.
4. Press a cursor key to position the dark blue line horizontally or vertically over the selected
element, establishing the break point at the point of intersection of the two.
5. Once the break point has been established, press ENTER; in the open popup it is possible to

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HOHWLQJHOHPHQWV
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile element and Abort Element.
3. Select the elements to be deleted and press BS.
5HYHUVLQJWKHGLUHFWLRQRIPRYHPHQW
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Profile utilities and the command Invert profile.
5RWDWLRQDURXQGWKHFHQWUHRIWKHSURILOH
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Rotation + Mirror and the command Rotate around
centre.
3. Set the angle of rotation of the profile in the ANGLE field on the open popup, and press
5RWDWLRQDURXQGDSRLQW
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Rotation + Mirror and the command Rotate around
point.
3. Set the co-ordinates for the point of rotation in the X ORIGIN and Y ORIGIN fields of the open
popup, and press ENTER on the Ok field.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
&RS\DQGURWDWLRQDURXQGDSRLQW
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Rotation + Mirror and the command Rotate profile
connect.
3. Set the co-ordinates for the point of rotation in the X ORIGIN and Y ORIGIN fields of the open
7XUQLQJRQD[LV
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile and Rotate + Mirror.
2. Select the command according to the type of mirror image to be produced. To produce a
mirror image on an axis parallel to the X axis, select the command Mirror profile on X; to
produce a mirror image on an axis parallel to the Y axis, select the command Mirror profile on
Y; to produce a mirror image on an axis corresponding to an element in the profile select the
command Mirror on slanted axis.
4. Set the distance of the axis of rotation from the side (side 1 for mirror parallel to the X axis,
side 4 for mirror parallel to the Y axis) in the DISTANCE field in the open popup. If the mirror
image is to be produced on an oblique axis select an element of the profile to be used as the
axis.
3DUWLDOWXUQLQJRQD[LV
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile and Rotate + Mirror.
2. Select the command according to the type of mirror image to be produced. To produce a
mirror image on an axis parallel to the X axis, select the command Partial mirror on X; to
produce a mirror image on an axis parallel to the Y axis, select the command Partial mirror on
Y; to produce a mirror image on an axis corresponding to an element in the profile select the
command Partial slanted mirror.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
$OLJQPHQW
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile and Align + move.
2. Select the command according to the type of alignment required. To align the profile with the
top left hand corner of the panel, select the command Align TOP LEFT; to align the profile
with the bottom left hand corner of the profile, select the command Align BOTTOM LEFT; to
align the profile with the top right hand corner of the panel, select the command Align TOP
RIGHT; to align the profile with the bottom right hand corner of the panel, select the command
Align BOTTOM RIGHT; to align the profile with the centre of the panel, select the command
Centre in panel.
4. Set the co-ordinates for movement of the selected corner in the open popup, and confirm by
pressing ENTER on the Ok field.
0RYLQJ
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile and Align + move.
2. Select the command Move inside panel.
4. Set the co-ordinates for movement in the open popup, and confirm by pressing ENTER on the
Ok field.
6FDOH
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Profile utilities and the command Scale Profile.
3. Set the percentage reduction or enlargement for the profile in the RESIZE field in the open

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
)LOOLQJ
INFORMAZIONI
This operation is only used to give a preview of the effect obtained, and is not taken into
consideration by the machine.
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Profile utilities and the command Profile filling.
3. Set the angle of the milling trajectories in the ANGLE field in the open popup, set the tool
radius in the TOOL RAD field, set the distance between the milling trajectories in the DISTAN
field.
4. To confirm the setting, press ENTER on the Ok field.
7RROUDGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
INFORMAZIONI
This operation is only used to give a preview of the effect obtained, and is not taken into
consideration by the machine.
1. Select the menu Menu and the option Correction.
2. Set the position of the tool with respect to the milling trajectory in the DIRECT. field in the
open popup, set the direction of movement of the tool during milling in the TYPE field, and set
the tool radius in the TOOL RAD field.
3. Press ESC to confirm the setting.
&UHDWLQJDFRQFHQWULFSURILOH
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Profile utilities and the command Concentric profile.
3. Set the distance between the profiles in the DELTA field in the open popup, and press

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
,PSRUWLQJDSURILOH
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, and Import profile.
2. Select the name of the profile to be imported, and press ENTER on the Ok field.
-RLQLQJRSHQSURILOHV
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile, Profile utilities and Connect open profiles.
2. Select the two profiles to be joined. The end point of the first profile selected will be connected
to the starting point of the second profile selected; the profile obtained by joining will become
a single profile and will lose its bond with the base drawings.
'HOHWLQJWKHSURILOHRQVFUHHQ
1. Select the menu Menu, the option Profile and Delete profile.
2. If several profiles are present, select the one to be deleted.
'HOHWLQJWKHWRROUDGLXVFRUUHFWLRQ
Select the menu Menu, the option Delete and Delete compens.
7RWDOGHOHWLRQ
Select the menu Menu, the option Delete and Delete all.
6HWWLQJSURILOHSRVLWLRQYDOXHV
1. Select the menu Menu and the option Text values.
2. If several profiles are present, select the one for which profile position values are to be set.
3. Select the command required, from the ones described below. To select a point outside the
grid use the mouse, moving the cursor with the central button and confirming with the left
button. To change the position of the value use the cursor keys. The software allows a
maximum of 25 position values to be inserted in each file.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
9DOXH[EHWZHHQSRLQWV
Enters the distance, parallel to the X axis, between two selected points.
9DOXH\EHWZHHQSRLQWV
Enters the distance, parallel to the Y axis, between two selected points.
3RLQWYDOXHRQVLGH
Enters the distances between the point and the selected sides.
'LVW[EHWZSDQGS
Enters the distance, parallel to the X axis, relating to the length of the selected segment.
'LVW\EHWZSDQGS
Enters the distance, parallel to the Y axis, relating to the length of the selected segment.
$UFUDGLXV
Enters the value relating to the radius of the selected curve.
9DOXH[\FHQWUH
Enters the value relating to the centre of the selected curve.
'HOHWHYDOXHV
Allows the user to select one or more values to be deleted simultaneously. Confirm the deletion by
pressing BS.

(a206h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
,QVHUWWH[WRQVHJPHQW;
Enters the value with text written by the user, parallel to the X axis, relating to the length of the
selected segment.
,QVHUWWH[WRQVHJPHQW<
Enters the value with text written by the user, parallel to the Y axis, relating to the length of the
selected segment.
,QVHUWWH[WRQDUF
Enters the value with text written by the user, relating to the radius of the selected curve.
,QVHUWWH[W
Enters the text written by the user in the selected point.
,QVHUWWH[WRQSRLQW
Enters the value with text written by the user, parallel to the X axis, between the point and the
selected sides.
,QVHUWWH[WRQFHQWUH
Enters the value with text written by the user, parallel to the X axis, relating to the centre of the
selected curve.
,QVHUWWH[WLQ;
Enters the value with text written by the user, parallel to the X axis, between two selected points.
,QVHUWWH[WLQ<
Enters the value with text written by the user, parallel to the Y axis, between two selected points.

(a206h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 'UDZLQJSURILOHVLQ';)IRUPDW
This part of the programming operations consists in creating a two-dimensional figure known as a
"profile" in a DXF format compatible with this software. The information provided in this chapter is
aimed at those who already know and use generic CAD packages.
The profile is imported to create the program and forms the working trajectory to be used to
machine the piece. To import the profile in DXF format correctly it is necessary to know its content
and characteristics, in order to select the right importation option. The importation options are of
two types: “DXF-gen” and “DXF-2D”.
It is also recommended that you:
n always create the profile drawing using a “multiple line” element;
n never name a layer using the number “0” (zero).
2SWLRQ';)JHQ
This option should be selected when the DXF file only contains the drawing of the profile, without a
drawing of working dimensions of the piece, with or without the technological data associated with
the geometrical entities.
2SWLRQ';)'
This option should be selected in the following cases:
a. when the DXF file contains the drawing of the profile, the boring operations, the milling
operations, the piece working dimensions, with or without the technological data associated
with each geometrical entity;
b. when the DXF file contains only the drawing of the profile with the technological data
associated with each geometrical entity.
By definition of certain conventions relating to the names of layers used by DXF files, it is possible
to associate the technological information to the drawings contained in the DXF files, translating
them into the machine format, which is known as PAN format.

(a230h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'UDZLQJSURILOHVLQ';)IRUPDW
The various types of machining operation are separated into layers occupied by the geometrical
entities. The association of layer name and type of machining operation can be customised, and
takes place using a setup menu (see paragraph 6.6 “Data configuration for import of DXF files”).
The following are the types of layer used:
n the layer identifying the piece or panel,
n the layer identifying vertical boring operations,
n the layer identifying horizontal boring operations on side 1,
n the layer identifying milling operations,
n the layer identifying cutting operations.
A circle in the vertical boring layer will be interpreted as a hole, whereas the same circle in a milling
layer will be interpreted as a milling operation.
/D\HUQDPHV
Interpretation of layers is not “case sensitive”, that is to say characters in upper and lower case are
interpreted in the same way, as all characters are converted into capitals.
INFORMAZIONI
You are recommended never to give a layer the name “0” (zero), as this is a parameter used by
the file conversion system. Also, each layer must be given a name, otherwise the system will
automatically give unnamed layers the name “zero”.
Example of names associated with various types of layer:

the layer panel takes the name PANEL;
the layer vertical bores takes the name VERTB;
the layer side 1 horizontal bores takes the name HORBOA;
the layer side 2 horizontal bores takes the name HORBOB;
the layer side 3 horizontal bores takes the name HORBOC;
the layer side 4 horizontal bores takes the name HORBOD;
the layer cutting takes the name CUTS;
the layer milling takes the name MILLS.

(a230h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
%DVLFQRWLRQVZKHQGUDZLQJ';)'W\SHSURILOHV
This chapter lists the rules involved when using a generic CAD package to insert all the
technological information required to create a PAN type file that can be run by the machine,
regardless of the syntax of the various commands in the various CAD packages.
&UHDWLQJZRUNLQJGLPHQVLRQVRISLHFH
Let us suppose we wish to draw the piece. We create a rectangle with dimensions x and y equal
to those of our piece, and insert it in the layer PANEL10K5.
The prefix for the layer name we have decided to associate with the panel is PANEL, the letters
following it identify the thickness of the piece. As it is not possible to use the "dot" character in
layer names, the latter has been replaced by a letter, in this case "K". Thus our piece has a
thickness of 10.5 mm.
The piece can also be created using 4 consecutive lines, arranged to form a rectangle. The piece
must also be orthogonal to the axes.
&UHDWLQJDYHUWLFDOERUH
A vertical bore can be created in two different ways:
n by inserting a circle in the layer in question,
n by inserting a block in a the layer in question.
The data required to identify a bore, both from a geometrical and from a technological point of
view, are the following:
Vertical bore data Inserted using a circle Inserted using a block

X coordinate Centre x of the circle x coordinate for insertion of
the block
Y coordinate Centre y of the circle y coordinate for insertion of
the block
Diameter Diameter of the circle Diameter associated with the
block
Depth Suffix of the name associated Depth associated with the
with the layer block
Bit type --- Type associated with the
block
Breaking --- ---

(a230h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
&UHDWLQJDQKRUL]RQWDOERUH
A horizontal bore can be inserted in three different ways:
n by inserting a rectangle in the layer in question,
n by inserting a multiple line element made up of 4 lines forming a rectangle in the layer in
question,
n by inserting a block in the layer in question.
Horizontal bore data Inserted using a rectangle Inserted using a block

or multiple line element
X coordinate Centre x of the rectangle or x coordinate for insertion of
multiple line element the block
Y coordinate Centre y of the rectangle or y coordinate for insertion of
multiple line element the block
Diameter Diameter of the rectangle or Diameter associated with the
multiple line element block
Depth Suffix of the name associated Depth associated with the
with the layer block
Bit type --- Type associated with the
block
Breaking --- ---
&UHDWLQJDFXW
A cut can be inserted in two different ways:
n by inserting a line in the layer in question,
n by inserting a multiple line element made up of 1 line in the layer in question.
Cut data Inserted using a line or multiple line element

xi coordinate xi coordinate of the starting point
yi coordinate yi coordinate of the starting point
xf coordinate xf coordinate of the end point
yf coordinate yf coordinate of the end point
Depth Suffix of the name associated with the layer
Tool From the layer name prefix if this does not indicate a generic cut
Let us suppose that the following names have been associated with the various types of layer:

(a230h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU

the layer milling takes the name MILLS;
the letter K is used to indicate the decimal point
Example 1
Let us assume we have a blade type tool with the name BLADE. A line in the layer BLADE5K5 is a
cut made using the tool BLADE with a depth of 5.5. The lead-in, rotation and interpolation speeds
are the ones indicated in the data for the bit and in the machine data.
Example 2
Let us assume we have a line in the layer CUTS10K5. This line will be a cut performed using a tool
to be defined, at a depth of 10.5.
Example 3
Let us assume we have a line in the layer CUTS5S1. This line will be a cut performed using a tool
to be defined, at a depth of 5 on side 1.
&UHDWLQJDPLOOLQJRSHUDWLRQ
A milling operation is inserted in two different ways:
n by inserting single lines and curves in the layer in question. The system automatically joins
adjacent lines and curves in the same layer to form profiles automatically. This mode is only
enabled when EGA type display of profiles is selected in the setup menu;
n by inserting a multiple line element made up of lines and curves in the layer in question
Milling data Inserted using lines, curves, multiple line element

Depth from the layer name suffix
Tool from the layer name prefix if this indicates a tool
Tool correction C = centre
R = right
L= left
from the layer name after the depth

(a230h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
Milling data Inserted using lines, curves, multiple line element

Lead-in / lead-out 0= no lead-in/lead-out
1= lead-in/lead-out on left
2= lead-in/lead-out on right
3= 3D lead-in/lead-out on left
4= 3D lead-in/lead-out on right
5= 3D lead-in/lead-out at centre with curve
6= 3D lead-in/lead-out at centre with line
this value follows the correction parameter in the layer

name
Let us suppose that the following names have been associated with the various types of layer

the layer milling takes the name MILLS;
the letter K is used to indicate the decimal point
Example 1
Let us assume we have a mill type tool with the name ROUTER. A multiple line element in the
layer ROUTER5K5C3 is a milling operation performed using the tool ROUTER with a depth of 5.5,
without compensation and with 3D type lead-in/lead-out on the left. The lead-in, rotation and
interpolation speeds are the ones indicated in the data for the bit and in the machine data.
Example 2
Let us assume we have a multiple line element in the layer MILLS10K5L1: this is a milling
operation performed using a tool to be defined with a depth of 10.5 with left hand compensation
and with lead-in/lead-out on the left.
Example 3
Let us assume we have a multiple line element in the layer MILLS5R2S2: this is a milling operation
performed using a tool to be defined with a depth of 5 with right hand compensation and
lead-in/lead-out on the right to be performed on side 2. Were the layer MILLS5S2R2 to have been
used, this would not have been correct.

(a230h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
Summary
Type of operation Technological information

Panel X dimension from the drawing
Y dimension from the drawing
Z dimension from the layer name suffix
Unit of measurement from the setup menu

Vertical Boring operations X coordinate from the drawing
defined using circles
Y coordinate from the drawing
Diameter from the drawing

defined using blocks
Diameter from the information associated with the block in

the setup menu
Depth from the information associated with the block in the

setup menu
Bit type from the information associated with the block in

the setup menu
defined using rectangles or four
lines Y coordinate from the drawing
Z coordinate from the layer name
Diameter from the drawing
Side from the layer name

(a230h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU

Horizontal Boring operations X coordinate from the drawing
defined using blocks
Diameter from the information associated with the block in

the setup menu
Depth from the information associated with the block in the

setup menu
Bit type from the information associated with the block in

the setup menu
Side from the layer name

Blade cutting operations defined X coordinate of the starting point from the drawing
using a line or a multiple line
element made up of a single line Y coordinate of the starting point from the drawing
X coordinate of the end point from the drawing
Y coordinate of the end point from the drawing
Tool from the layer name if this indicates a tool
Side is S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 in the layer name

(a230h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU

Vertical Milling operations Milling route from the drawing by means of a multiple line
element made up of lines and curves
Tool from the layer name if this indicates a tool
Tool correction
C = centre
R = right
L= left
from the layer name after the depth
Lead-in/lead-out
0= no lead-in/lead-out
1= lead-in/lead-out on left
2= lead-in/lead-out on right
3= 3D lead-in/lead-out on left
4= 3D lead-in/lead-out on right
5= 3D lead-in/lead-out at centre with curve
6= 3D lead-in/lead-out at centre with line
this value follows the correction parameter in the layer

name
Side is S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 in the layer name

(a230h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU

(a230h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
EGA programming is the creation of a drawing by setting steps consisting of geometrical elements
(segments, arcs), not all the data of which are known. The drawing represents the working
trajectory of the tool. This programming procedure is carried out in the EDITOR\ASSISTED page,
using the EGA tools of the bar at the top.
Start work (green)

Used to define the starting point of the drawing and the programming technological data.
Segments
Used to access the list of commands available for drawing segments.
Arcs
Used to access the list of commands available for drawing arcs.
Join
Used to insert links when the drawing is complete.
End of work (red)

Used to terminate the drawing.
&UHDWLQJDQ(*$GUDZLQJ
1. Select the icon in the tool bar of the EDITOR\ASSISTED page. In the Xi field, type the X
coordinate of the starting point of the drawing, and in the Yi field, type the Y coordinate of the
starting point of the drawing. In the CAM field, press ENTER to access setting of the
programming technological data, as described in paragraph 16.9 “Description of the fields for
technological data”. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm.
2. In the tool bar, select the icon relating to the geometrical element to be drawn (Segments or
Arcs), described in paragraph 15.2 “Description of EGA drawing commands”.
3. Select the command required (the name appears in the comments bar). The comments
highlighted with a yellow surround are temporarily disabled, since they cannot supply
solutions compatible with the previous step.

(a234h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
4. Set the fields, consulting “Description of fields” (page 15 - 2) and press the ENTER key on
the Ok field to confirm. To apply links, first complete the drawing.
5. Once the drawing is complete, select the icon and save the program.
(QWHULQJFRQQHFWLRQVLQWKH(*$GUDZLQJ
1. Before a connecting link can be inserted, the drawing must be complete. After this, locate the
cursor on the programming line relating to the first of the two elements to be joined together
and select the icon in the tool bar. The main programming parameters are shown
below.
2. When execution of the links is complete, save the program.
'HVFULSWLRQRI(*$GUDZLQJFRPPDQGV
The following is a description of the commands available for creation of the EGA drawing. To
access the list, select the icon (for segments) or (for arcs).
'HVFULSWLRQRIILHOGV
The following is a description of the fields which appear during setting of the commands for
segments and arcs.
Ang Angle
BA For segments, angle in sexagesimal degrees which the segment

forms with the X axis.
For arcs: angle in sexagesimal degrees subtended by the arc.
BL Length of the geometrical element (segment or arc).
F% Percentage of the interpolations speed, set in the technological data

(e.g. if 80 is typed, the element will be processed at 80% of the
speed set)
I X coordinate of the centre of the circumference.

(a234h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
J Y coordinate of the centre of the circumference.
RI Length of the X semi-axis of the ellipse.
RJ Length of the Y semi-axis of the ellipse.
Sol Number of solutions provided by the system.
Ver Work feed direction. Select AC for anti-clockwise, C for clockwise

Direzione di avanzamento di lavoro
Xi X coordinate of the starting point of the geometrical element.
Xf X coordinate of the end point of the geometrical element.
Yi Y coordinate of the starting point of the geometrical element.
Yf Y coordinate of the end point of the geometrical element.
Ze Processing depth increment in the final part of the element.
Zs Processing depth increment in the starting part of the element.
6HJPHQWV
The following is a description of the commands available for creation of a geometrical element of
the "segment" type. For explanations on the fields to be set, consult “Description of fields” (page
15 - 2).
end point = Segment having known end point
Select ; the main parameters for programming are shown below.

(a234h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
length and angle = Segment having known length and angle
final X and angle = Segment having known angle and X coordinate of end point
final Y and angle = Segment having known angle and Y coordinate of end point
angle and final point = Segment having known angle and end point

(a234h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
X final and length = Segment having known length and X coordinate of end point
Y final and length = Segment having known length and Y coordinate of end point
angle+inters.of next elem = Segment having known angle and successive secant
angle+tang.of previous el. = Segment having known angle and successive tangent

(a234h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
tangent of next element = Segment tangent to the successive element
Select ; this command creates a segment starting at the end point of the previous
element and continuing as far as the point of tangency with the next element.
f.point+tang.of prev.elem. = Segment having known end point and previous tangent
$UFV
The following is a description of the commands available for creation of a geometrical element of
the "arc" type. For explanations on the fields to be set, consult “Description of fields” (page 15 -
2).
centre and final point = Arc having known centre and end point
radius and final point = Arc having known radius and end point

(a234h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
centre, radius and length = Arc having known centre, radius and length
centre, radius and angle = Arc having known centre, radius and angle
centre and angle = Arc having known centre and angle
centre and length = Arc having known centre and length

(a234h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
f.point+tang.of prev.elem. = Arc having known end point and previous tangent
centre+tang.of foll.elem. = Arc having known centre and following tangent
radius+tang.of next elem. = Arc having known radius and successive tangent
cen.+int.of next element = Arc having known centre and successive secant

(a234h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH
cen.rad+tan.of next elem. = Arc having known centre, radius and successive tangent
cen.rad+int.of next elem = Arc having known centre, radius and successive secant

(a234h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HVLJQLQJLQ(*$PRGH

(a234h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
&UHDWLQJWKHSURJUDP
A program is a set of instructions necessary for the machining of the panel.
1. From the MANUAL page, select the Edit P menu. Access to the fields of the page and set up
the data as described below.
Name: name of the program (maximum 8 characters).
[mm/ ’ ’ ]: unit of measurement, mm=millimeters, ‘ ‘=inches.
Sp. setup: name of the tooling setup, for the boring head spindles to be used in the
program.
Router Config: name of the tooling setup for the slots to be used with the program.
Clamp: has the same purpose of the CLAMP STOP SELECTION function key, and
associates it to the program.
Free wheels: has the same purpose of the BALL-TYPE SUPPORTS SELECTION
function key, and associates it to the program.
Origin: has the same purpose of the FRONT STOP SELECTION function key, and
associates it to the program.
Pushers: has the same purpose of the PUSHERS function key, and associates it to the
program.
Length: Size of the panel in the direction of axis X.
Width: Size of the panel in the direction of axis Y.
Thickn: Size of the panel in the direction of axis Z.
X of sosp.: Automatic panel machining stop position in the direction of axis X.
2. To save the data, select the Files menu and the Save option. If you select the Save + Open
option, the program will be saved and opened automatically in the AUTOMATIC\PROGRAM
page to be executed.
3. If you want to retain the previous name, press the ENTER key on the OK field, otherwise
enter the name of the program in the File field (maximum 8 characters).

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
4. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation and a file with the extension
*.PAN will be automatically created.
2SHQLQJFKDQJLQJDQGVDYLQJDSURJUDP
1. From the MANUAL page, select the Edit P menu.
2. Select the Files menu and the Open option.
3. Select the name of the program to open and press the ENTER key.
5. Select the menu Edit F to modify programming of optimised boring operations, or the menu
Edit A to modify programming of non optimised boring, cutting and milling operations.
6. Move the cursor to the program line to change and press the ENTER key.
7. Change the data as required.
Deleting a program line. Move the cursor to the line to be deleted and select the Del
menu. Press the ENTER key on Yes to confirm the deletion, or on No to cancel the
operation.
Copying a program line. Move the cursor to the line to be copied and select the Copy
menu. Select the Copy over option to copy the line and place it above the selected line,
or the Copy under option to copy the line and place it under the selected line.
Moving a program line. Move the cursor to the line to be moved and select the Copy
menu. Select the Move over option to move the line one line above, or the Move under
option to move the line one line below.
8. When all changes are complete, save the program. Access the MANUAL page and select the
Edit P menu.
9. To save the data, select the Files menu and the Save option. If you select the Save+Open
option, the program will be saved and opened automatically in the AUTOMATIC\PROGRAM
page to be executed.
10. If you want to retain the previous name, press the ENTER key on the OK field, otherwise
enter the name of the program in the File field (maximum 8 characters).
11. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the operation and a file with the extension
*.PAN will be automatically created.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
3DUDPHWHUJXLGHGDGMXVWPHQWRIWKHSURJUDP
The expression “parameter-guided adjustment of the program” indicates the automatic adaption of
the programmed machining to match the changed dimensions of the panel. To implement
parameter-guided adjustment in a program, you first create parameters associated to values such
as for instance the development of an expression, and then apply these parameters to the
programming. To better understand the concept behind the parameter-guided adjustment of
machining program, and how you can apply it to your own work, please refer to 16.6
“Programming optimised borings using macros”.
The parameters are created in the relative table accessible from the EDITOR\OPTIMISED
BORINGS or EDITOR\ASSISTED pages, by selecting the Param menu. The Parameters Table of
each program contains as default all the main parameters relative to the dimensions of the panel
(X = Length, Y = Width, Z = Thickness). Each line in the table contains a single parameter, and is
made up of two fields: on the left the name and on the right the value with the string “/MMP” (e.g.
32/MMP), which the NC uses to convert automatically to the set unit of measurement. It is also
possible to replace the value with an expression. Parameters having an expression in their value
field must be written after the parameters having a fixed numerical value to allow the NC to
calculate the value of the expression without interpretation errors.
(QWHULQJH[SUHVVLRQV
Besides the normal alphanumeric characters, the expression parser of the NC can also accept the
following calculation operators:
%(x) calculation of the integer part of the value “x”.

$(x) calculation of the sine of “x”.
@(x) calculation of the cosine of “x”.
^(x) calculation of the square root of “x”.
_A(x) Calculation of the arc tangent of “x”.
_T(x) Calculation of the tangent of “x”.
'HOHWLQJDSURJUDP
1. From the EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA, select the Files menu and the Delete option to delete a
specific program, or the Delete all option to delete all the program stored in the memory of the
NC.
2. Select the name of the program to delete and press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm
the operation. Press the ESC key to cancel.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
3URJUDPPLQJRSWLPLVHGERULQJRSHUDWLRQV
The options available in this type of programming are described below:
9HUWLFDOERULQJRQVWUDLJKWOLQH
1. From the EDITOR\OPTIMISED BORINGS page, select the command.
2. Press the ENTER key to set up the fields as indicated below.
Sp: number of the reference corner, for the initial boring co-ordinates.
X: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis X.
Y: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis Y.
PRF: depth of boring.
D: diameter of boring.
Rip: repetition of the boring.
Tool: type of tool.

Select norm for blind boring, lanc for through boring, N.l. for boring with
diameter above 14 mm, Ctsk for tapered boring.
Type: type of repetition of the boring.

Select - to repeat on a straight line.
Repeat: total number of borings to execute during the repetition.
Stepx: centre distance between each boring to be executed along axis X, during the
repetition.
Stepy: centre distance between each boring to be executed along axis Y, during the
repetition.
3. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the programming. Press the ESC key to
cancel.
X Stepx X
Norm Lanc N.l. Ctsk
Co Co
Y Y
Stepy
D 14 mm
DPT

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOERULQJRQDQJOHGOLQH
Sp: number of the reference corner, for the initial co-ordinates of the boring operation
and the angle of the line for the repetition of the boring.
Rip: boring repetition set-up.
Tool: type of tool.

Select Norm for blind boring, Lanc for through boring, N.l. for boring with
diameter Above 14 mm, Ctsk for tapered boring.
Type: type of repetition.

Select \ to repeat along an angled line.
Step: centre distance between each boring to be executed along the angled line, during
the repetition.
Angle: angle of the line, from the side of the panel which is common with the direction of
axis X.
cancel.
X Step
Norm Lanc N.l. Ctsk
Co
Y
Ang
D 14 mm
DPT

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOERULQJRQFLUFXPIHUHQFH
Sp: number of the reference corner, for the initial co-ordinates of the boring and the circle
for the repetition of the boring.
Tool: type of tool.


Select o to repeat on a circle.
Xc: co-ordinate of the centre of the circumference along axis X.
Yc: co-ordinate of the centre of the circumference along axis Y.
Angle: angle of the centre distances between each boring to be executed along the
circumference, during the repetition.
cancel.
Xc
X
Norm Lanc N.l. Ctsk.
Sp
Y
Yc
Ang
D 14 mm
DPT

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
+RUL]RQWDOERULQJRQVWUDLJKWOLQH
L: number of the side on which the boring is to be executed.
Sp: number of the reference corner, for the initial co-ordinates of the boring.
Z: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis Z.
Tool: type of tool.

repetition.
repetition.
Stepz: centre distance between each boring to be executed along axis Z, during the
repetition.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel.
Norm Lanc N.l. Ctsk
Stepz Z
Sp
Y
Stepy
D 14 mm
DPT
X Stepx
Z
Stepz
3URJUDPPLQJRSWLPLVHGERULQJVXVLQJPDFURV
Macros are parametric subprograms that may be used during programming. Ten macros are
available, 7 of which have been defined already by BIESSE, and 3 are available to the operator.
Macros are created like the programs and have the same extension (*.PAN), but must be saved
with the prefix “BSM” before the identification number (e.g. BSM8) to allow the NC to recognise
them as macro. Since they are essentially programs, they can be opened, changed,
parameterised and saved as such.
$FFHVVLQJWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIWKHPDFURVIRUFKDQJLQJWKHYDOXHV
More information on the creation of parameters may be found in the paragraph 16.3
“Parameter-guided adjustment of the program”.
1. From the EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA page open the macro as a program and select the Edit
F menu.
2. Select the Param menu and press the ENTER key to access the parameters. To determine
which parameters may be modified, refer to the description of the selected macro. When
modifying a value, never cancel the setting /MMP, as this is required to calculate the value
automatically in the unit of measurement set by the program.
3. When the change has been completed, press twice the ESC key and save the macro as a
program, retaining the original name.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
8VLQJPDFURVIRURSWLPLVHGERULQJRSHUDWLRQV
1. From the EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA page, select the Edit F menu.
2. Select the macro to be applied to the program from the 10 present in the commands bar and
press the ENTER key. Automatically, the NC will open a popup where you can enter the
offset of the macro, that is the reference for the application in the program. To determine the
offset, please refer to the description of the selected macro.
3. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the use of the macro, and then save the
program. Press the ESC key to cancel.
Dx
(1)
Dy Offset

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Executes two vertical rows of borings, for the insertion of shelf supports. The number of borings to
be executed is calculated automatically and placed at the centre of the panel in the direction of
axis X.
To access the macro, press the icon. The values of the macro application offset are as
follows:
Dx: 0 (not modifiable by the operator)
Dy: 0 (not modifiable by the operator)
Edge: 1 (not modifiable by the operator)
The following parameters have been used in the macro; only those shown in the diagram can be
modified by the operator.
OX = 100/MMP
P = 32/MMP
RIP = %((X-2*OX)/P)+1
RE = X-OX*2)-P*(RIP-1)
S = 37/MMP
DS
T
OX P OX
DST
DST
In addition, the following fields may be changed by pressing the ENTER key on the programming
lines.
PRF: boring depth
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Executes two vertical rows of borings, for the insertion of shelf supports. The number of borings to
be executed is calculated automatically, and placed at a specific initial value in the direction of axis
X, with reference to the selected corner.
follows:
Edge: ... (modifiable by the operator)
OX = 100/MMP
P = 32/MMP
RIP = %((X-2*OX)/P)+1
RE = (X-OX*2)-P*(RIP-1)
S = 37/MMP
DS
T
OX P
Edge
DST
DST
lines.
Sp: number of the reference corner

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
PRF: boring depth
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Allows the execution of two vertical rows of borings used to assemble the panel with other panels.
The number of borings to be executed is calculated automatically, and placed at a specific initial
value in the direction of axis Y, with reference to the selected corner.
follows:
Dx: ... (modifiable by the operator)
OSY = 30/MMP
PS = 64/MMP
RIPS = %((Y-2*OSY)/PS)+1
RES = Y-OSY*2)-PS*(RIPS-1)
S
Dx
Edge
OSY
PS
lines.
PRF: boring depth

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Allows the execution of one vertical row of borings used to assemble the panel with other panels.
The number of borings to be executed is calculated automatically, and placed on the selected side
beginning at the selected corner.
follows:
Dz: ... (modifiable by the operator)
Side: ... (modifiable by the operator)
Edge: ... (modifiable by the operator, depending on the side)
OSY = 30/MMP
PS = 64/MMP
RIPS = %((Y-2*OSY)/PS)+1
RES = (Y-OSY*2)-PS*(RIPS-1)
S
Dz
Edge
OSY
PS
Dz
OSY PS
lines.
PRF: boring depth

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Allows the execution of a vertical boring used to place a hinge on the panel. The boring is set
automatically along axis X starting at the selected corner.
follows:
Dy: ... (modifiable by the operator)
PC = 25/MMP
X = 10/MMP
PC
Y
Dx
PCX PCX
Edge
Dy
PCY
lines.
PRF: boring depth
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Allows the execution of a vertical boring used to place a cross-shaped mounting plate on the
panel. The boring is set automatically along axis X starting at the selected corner.
follows:
P = 48/MMP
B
PB
= =
Edge
Dy
Dx
lines.
PRF: boring depth
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0DFUR%60
Allows the execution of a vertical boring used to place a straight mounting plate on the panel. The
boring is set automatically along axis X starting at the selected corner.
follows:
P = 48/MMP
B
Dx
Edge
Dy
=
PB
=
lines.
PRF: boring depth
D: boring diameter

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
3URJUDPPLQJQRQRSWLPLVHGERULQJ
The options available in this type of programming are described below:
9HUWLFDOERULQJXVLQJERULQJXQLW
1. From the EDITOR\ASSISTED page, select the instrument and the command .
X: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis X, referred to the first spindle entered in field
T.
Y: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis Y, referred to the first spindle entered in field
T.
PRF: depth of boring, referred to the first spindle entered in field T. It is recommended
that tools with the same overhang be used on the relevant spindles to prevent
possible damages caused by an excessive boring depth.
VEL: rotation speed of the spindles.
T: number of the spindle to be used for the boring. If you want to use more than one
spindle at the same time, enter a “.” (point) between each spindle number (e.g.,
to use spindles 4, 1, 8 and 9 enter 4.1.8.9).
Head: for displaying the numbering of the spindles.
cancel.
Sp
1 4 PRF
8
9

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOERULQJRQVWUDLJKWOLQHZLWKVORW
Z: not used.
CAM: access to setting of the technological data fields, listed below.
Technological item T: name of the tool. Press ENTER for access to the list.
Technological item S: slot activation. The first field on the left is used to select the
number of the slot to be used during processing; to use another slot
simultaneously, select the name in the second field. If the slots are not
selected in the fields, the system activates the first slot containing the chosen
tool, by default.
Technological item Depth: processing depth.
Technological item Interp. speed: not usable.
Technological item Entry speed: speed at which the tool enters the panel.
Technological item Rotation speed: tool rotation speed.
Technological item No. steps: number of times the tool enters the panel, to carry out the
process (zero is equivalent to 1).
Rep: boring repetition set-up.

Repeat: total number of borings to execute during the boring repetition.
repetition.
repetition.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel.
X Stepx X
Slot 2
Sp Sp
Y Y
Stepy
Depth

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOERULQJRQDQJOHGOLQHZLWKVORW
Z: not used.
number of the slot to be used during processing; to use another slot simultaneously,
select the name in the second field. If the slots are not selected in the fields, the system
activates the first slot containing the chosen tool, by default.
Rep: boring repetition set-up.

Select \ to repeat on an angled line.
Step: centre distance between each boring to be executed along the angled line, during
the repetition.
Angle: angle of the line, from the side of the panel which is common with the direction of
axis X.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel.
Step Slot 2
X
Co
Y
Ang
Depth

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOERULQJRQDFLUFXPIHUHQFHZLWKVORW
Z: not used.
tool, by default.

Select o to repeat on a circle.
Xc: co-ordinate of the centre of the circumference along axis X.
Yc: co-ordinate of the centre of the circumference along axis Y.
Angle: angle of centre distance between each boring to be executed along the
circumference, during the repetition.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel.
Slot 2
Xc
X
Edge
Y
Yc
Ang
Depth

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
+RUL]RQWDOERULQJXVLQJWKHERULQJXQLW
L: number of side on which the boring is to be executed.
X: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis X, referred to the first spindle entered in field
T.
Y: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis Y, referred to the first spindle entered in field
T.
Z: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis Z, referred to the first spindle entered in field
T.
PRF: depth of boring, referred to the first spindle entered in field T. It is recommended
that tools with the same overhang be used on the relevant spindles to prevent
possible damages caused by an excessive boring depth.
VEL: rotation speed of the spindles.
T: number of the spindle to be used for the boring. If you want to use more than one
spindle at the same time, enter a “.” (point) between each spindle number (e.g.,
to use spindles 11 and 13 enter 11.13).
Head: for displaying the numbering of the spindles.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel.
Y
DPT
11
13
Dpt
15

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
+RUL]RQWDOERULQJZLWKVORW
Z: initial co-ordinate of the boring along axis Z.
tool, by default.

repetition.
repetition.
Stepz: centre distance between each boring to be executed along axis Z, during the
repetition.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel.
Stepz Z
Stepy Slot 2
X Stepx
Profondità
Z
Stepz

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
$[LV&ERULQJRQDVHJPHQWRIWKHSURILOH
D: distance between the starting point of the segment and the point of impact of the first
bore on the segment.
Orx: co-ordinate for the starting point of the segment along axis X.
Ory: co-ordinate for the starting point of the segment along axis Y.
Qz: co-ordinate for the boring axis along axis Z, with respect to side 5 of the panel.
Ang: angle of the segment with respect to axis X.
St: distance (step) between the centers of each of the bores to be worked along the
segment, during repeated boring operations.
Rip: repeat setting, that is to say the number of bores to be worked along the segment.
number of the slot to be used during processing. If the slots are not selected in
the fields, the system activates the first slot containing the chosen tool, by
default.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel
Edge
Ory
Orx
0°
Angle (+)
D
St
Depth
Qz

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
$[LV&ERULQJRQDQDUFRIWKHSURILOH
Rg: radius of the arc.
Orx: co-ordinate for the starting point of the segment along axis X.
Ory: co-ordinate for the starting point of the segment along axis Y.
Qz: co-ordinate for the boring axis along axis Z, with respect to side 5 of the panel.
Ang: angle of the point of impact for the first bore with respect to axis X; use a positive
value for a convex arc, and a negative value for a concave arc.
Tip: type of boring operation; RAD for radial boring, NORAD for non-radial boring.
Anp: angle of NORAD type boring axis with respect to axis X.
St: angle of distance on the arc (step) between each of the bores to be worked, during
repeated boring operations.
Rip: repeat setting, that is to say the number of bores to be worked on the arc.
number of the slot to be used during processing. If the slots are not selected in
the fields, the system activates the first slot containing the chosen tool, by
default.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
cancel
RAD NORAD
Edge Edge Edge
Ory Ory
Orx St Orx
0° 0°
Rg Rg
St St
Depth 0° 0°
Anp
Ang(+) Ang(-) Ang(+)
Qz
6HWWLQJPLOOLQJRSHUDWLRQV
All types of milling operation are carried out with the tool or aggregate fitted on slot 2, machining
along a trajectory made up of geometrical elements (straight lines, curves, etc.), geometrical
figures (polygons) and drawings known as “profiles” (preset by BIESSE or created by the
operator). The procedures that can be used for this type of programming operation are described
below.
(OHPHQWVDQGJHRPHWULFDOILJXUHV
1. From the EDITOR\ASSISTED page, select the tool and the command required; if you
wish to program milling of a slot (using the command ASOLA_00) select the tool and the
command .
2. Select the command desired and press the ENTER key to access the setting of fields, as
described in 16.9 “Description of the fields for technological data”.
3. When setting of the fields is complete, press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the
programming; to abort press ESC. Then save the program.
The following is a description of the macros available for creating geometrical figures and
elements. The parameters present in these macros are “local”.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
LINE_00 command
Select ; creates a line between two points, P1 (first point) and P2 (second point).
The parameters to be set during application of the macro are shown below.
x2
y1 x1
y2
P1
P2
LINE_01 command
Select ; creates a line which starts from point P1 with an angle a and length l. The
parameters to be set during application of the macro are shown below.
x1
y1
P1
a
LANGXCOS command
Select ; creates a line which starts from point P1 with an angle alf (other than 90°
and 270°) and ends on point PK, which is on a straight line parallel to side 1 and at a
distance xk from it. The parameters to be set during application of the macro are shown
below.
xk
x1
y1
P1 alf
PK

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
LANGYCOS command
Select ; creates a line which starts from point P1 with an angle alf (other than 0° and
180°) and ends on point PK, which is on a straight line parallel to side 4 and at a distance
xk from it. The parameters to be set during application of the macro are shown below.
x1
y1
P1 alf
yk
PK
DUELINCO command
Select ; creates two lines, the first between points P1 and P2 and the second
between points P3 and P4. Generally these lines are programmed on opposite sides, for
squaring the panel. The parameters to be set during application of the macro are shown
below.
x4
x1
y1
P1
y4
P4
y2
y3
P2
x2 P3
x3
CIRCLE_00 command
Select ; creates a circle with centre on point P1 and radius r. The parameters to be
set during application of the macro are shown below.
x1
y1
P1

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
ARC3P command
Select ; creates an arc passing through three points, P1 (first point), P2 (second
point) and P3 (third point). The parameters to be set during application of the macro are
shown below.
x3
x2
x1
y1
P1
y2
y3
P2 P3
ARCC2P command
Select ; creates an arc with centre on point PC and passing through two points, P1
(first point) and P2 (second point). The parameters to be set during application of the
macro are shown below.
x1
xc
x2
y1
yc
P1
y2
PC
P2

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
ARCR2P_1 command
Select ; creates an arc having opening less than 180° with radius r and passing
through two points, P1 (first point) and P2 (second point); the arc is calculated on the left
of the straight line passing from point P1 to point P2. The parameters to be set during
application of the macro are shown below.
x2
x1
y1
P1
y2
P2
ARCR2P_2 command
Select ; creates an arc having opening greater than 180° with radius r and passing
through two points, P1 (first point) and P2 (second point); the arc is calculated on the
right of the straight line passing from point P1 to point P2. The parameters to be set
during application of the macro are shown below.
x1
x2
y1
P1
y2
r
P2

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
ARCR2P_3 command
Select ; creates an arc having opening less than 180° with radius r and passing
through two points, P1 (first point) and P2 (second point); the arc is calculated on the
right of the straight line passing from point P1 to point P2. The parameters to be set
during application of the macro are shown below.
x2
x1
y1
P1
y2
P2
ARCR2P_4 command
Select ; creates an arc having opening greater than 180° with radius r and passing
through two points, P1 (first point) and P2 (second point); the arc is calculated on the left
of the straight line passing from point P1 to point P2. The parameters to be set during
application of the macro are shown below.
x2
x1
y1
P1
y2
P2

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
BOX_00 command
Select ; creates a rectangle with right angles of length a and width b at a distance d1
from side 1 and d2 from side 4. The parameters to be set during application of the macro
are shown below.
d1 a
d2
b
BOX_01 command
Select ; creates a rectangle of length a and width b at a distance d1 from side 1 and
d2 from side 4, with connecting arcs of radius r1 on the top left-hand corner and of radius
r2 on the top right-hand corner. The parameters to be set during application of the macro
are shown below.
d1 a
d2
r2
r1
b
BOX_02 command
d2 from side 4, with a connecting arc of radius r on each corner. The parameters to be
set during application of the macro are shown below.
d1 a
d2
r r
b
r r

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
BOX_03 command
d2 from side 4, with connecting arcs of radius r on the top corners and of radius R on the
bottom corners. The parameters to be set during application of the macro are shown
below.
d1 a
d2
r
b
OVALE command
Select ; creates an oval of length A and width B with centre on point C. The
xc
yc
C
B
ELLISSE command
Select ; creates an ellipse of length a and width d with centre on point pc. The
xc
yc
pc
b

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
TRIANG_S command
Select ; creates a right-angled triangle of length L and width H. The parameters to

be set during application of the macro are shown below.
H L
TRIANG_R command
Select ; creates a right-angled triangle of length L with connecting arcs of radius r2

on the top corner, of radius r1 on the bottom right-hand corner and of radius r3 on the
bottom left-hand corner; the base of the triangle is at a distance H from side 4. The
r2
H
r1
r3
ASOLA_00 command
Select ; creates a slot of length L and radius R, with centre on point pc. The
xc
yc
R pc
R

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0LOOLQJIRUDVVHPEO\RIWRSVDW
1. From the EDITOR\ASSISTED page select the instrument .
2. Select the command desired and press the ENTER key to access the setting of fields, as
described in 16.9 “Description of the fields for technological data”.
The following is a description of the macros available for creating the two parts (male and female)
for assembly. The parameters present in these macros are “local”.
TOPDORSX command
Select ; creates a working trajectory (from point P1) which will produce the “female
part of the left-hand corner”. The parameters to be set during application of the macro
are shown below.
D
x1
y1
P1
R
H
TOPDORDX command
Select ; creates a working trajectory (from point P1) which will produce the “female
part of the right-hand corner”. The parameters to be set during application of the macro
are shown below.
D
x1
y1
P1
R
H

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
TOPDVESX command
Select ; creates a working trajectory (from point P1) which will produce the “male
part of the right-hand corner”. The parameters to be set during application of the macro
are shown below.
H
x1
y1
R
D
TOPDVEDX command
Select ; creates a working trajectory (from point P1) which will produce the “male
part of the left-hand corner”. The parameters to be set during application of the macro
are shown below.
H
x1
y1
R
D

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
3URILOHV
2. Select the profile desired and proceed to set the fields, as described in 16.9 “Description of
the fields for technological data”.
3URILOHVIRUGRRUVSUHVHWE\%,(66(
2. Select the profile desired and proceed to set the fields, as described in 16.9 “Description of
the fields for technological data”.
'HVFULSWLRQRIWKHILHOGVIRUWHFKQRORJLFDOGDWD
T: name of the tool. Press ENTER for access to the list.
S: slot activation. The first field on the left is used to select the number of the slot to be
used during processing; to use another slot simultaneously, select the name in
the second field. If the slots are not selected in the fields, the system activates
the first slot containing the chosen tool, by default.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Depth: milling depth (prf).
prf
prf prf
prf
Plane: number of the side on which the milling procedure is to be carried out.For use of
the option 5C please consult the paragraph on 16.13 “Settings used when
working on surface 5C”
Correction: tool position in relation to the work trajectory.

Select NO to locate the tool in the centre of the trajectory, Lh to locate the tool
on the left of the trajectory, or Rh to locate the tool on the right of the trajectory..
NO SX DX
Direction: tool feed direction during milling.

Select DIR for the basic direction of the geometrical element or REV to reverse
the basic direction of the geometrical element.
DIR INV

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
In: movement which the tool performs to enter the working trajectory.
Select NO to enter without setting, LA90 to enter with circular connecting
movement at 90° on the left of the trajectory, RA90 to enter with circular
connecting movement at 90° on the right of the trajectory, 3D_LA to enter with
spiral connecting movement at 90° on the left of the trajectory, 3D_RA to enter
with spiral connecting movement at 90° on the right of the trajectory, 3DC_A to
enter with downward approach connecting on the centre of the trajectory,
3DC_L to enter with straight downward approach on the centre of the
trajectory, or CAD to enter as set by the CAD.
LA90 RA90
3D_LA 3D_RA
3DC_A 3DC_L
Out: movement which the tool performs to exit from the working trajectory.
Select NO to exit without setting, LA90 to exit with circular connecting
movement at 90° on the left of the trajectory, RA90 to exit with circular
connecting movement at 90° on the right of the trajectory, 3D_LA to exit with
spiral connecting movement at 90° on the left of the trajectory, 3D_RA to exit
with spiral connecting movement at 90° on the right of the trajectory, 3DC_A to
exit with upward connecting movement on the centre of the trajectory, 3DC_L

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
to exit with straight upward movement on the centre of the trajectory, or CAD to
exit as set by the CAD.
LA90 RA90
3D_LA 3D_RA
3DC_A 3DC_L
Join: execution of connections between elements (of the macro) which are not tangents
but which intersect at an angle smaller than the value indicated later in
Tolerance Ang. Select Y to perform the connections or N not to perform them.
Interp.Speed: milling feed speed.
Entry Speed: entry speed of tool into panel.
Rotation Speed: rotation speed of the tool.
No.steps: number of times the panel enters the panel to complete the milling procedure
(zero is the same as 1).

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Distance in-out: centre distance (d) between the points where the working trajectory
enters and leaves the panel.
d d
2nd machining: quantity of material to be removed during the finishing stage.
2nd mach speed: tool feed speed during the finishing stage.
Groove: value by which the side to be processed is translated in relation to the main side
already indicated in Plane.
Y X Y X
Z Z
y
x
Y X
Z

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Tolerance angle: value of the angle (a) for execution of the connections (see
Connections field).
P a P
a
P P
a
Radius in-out: radius (r) of the connecting arc between the working trajectory entry and
exit points.
r r
r r

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Util: access to the set-up of other data.
ROTATION Angle: angle for flat rotation of the geometrical figure or element on its own
centre.
FILL Yes/No: milling inside the geometrical figure (polygon).

Select Y to perform the milling process, N not to perform it.
FILL Angle: angle (a) of the working trajectories during milling inside the polygon.
FILL Delta: distance (d) between the working trajectories during milling inside the
polygon.
FILL Depth: depth of the working trajectories during milling inside the polygon.
CONCENTRIC No.: number of concentric polygons to be milled.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
CONCENTRIC Delta: distance between the concentric polygons to be milled. If the

distance has a positive (+) value, the concentrics are milled on the outside of
the polygon; if the distance is negative (-) they are milled on the inside.
(+) (-)
3 2 1 12 3
CONCENTRIC Depth: depth of the concentric polygons to be milled.
JUSTIFICATION Corner: panel reference corner for the position of the element or
geometrical figure (also defined as the “object”):
Select NO to position the object at the distance (from sides 1 and 4) shown in
the parameters;
SX UP for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the top left-hand
corner at the distance set later in Offset 1 and Offset 2;
SX DW for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the bottom left-hand
DX DW for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the bottom
right-hand corner at the distance set later in Offset 1 and Offset 2;
DX UP for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the top right-hand
CENTER to position the object in the centre of the panel.;
MSX UP for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the top left-hand
corner at the distance (x1, y1) from the sides, shown in the parameters.
MSX DW for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the bottom
left-hand corner at the distance (x1, y1) from the sides, shown in the
parameters.
MDX DW for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the bottom
right-hand corner at the distance (x1, y1) from the sides, shown in the
parameters.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
MDX UP for the mirror image of the object in the direction of the top right-hand
corner at the distance (x1, y1) from the sides, shown in the parameters.
NO SX UP SX DW
Offset2
y1
x1 Offset1
Offset1
Offset2
DX DW DX UP CENTER
Offset2
Offset1
Offset1
Offset2
MSX UP MSX DW MDX DW

y1
x1
x1 x1
y1
y1
MDX UP
y1
x1
JUSTIFICATION Offset1: distance of the element or geometrical figure from side 4.
JUSTIFICATION Offset2: distance of the element or geometrical figure from side 1.
Param: access to setting of the local parameters of the macro.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
6HWWLQJFXWWLQJRSHUDWLRQV
The options available in this type of programming are described below.
9HUWLFDOFXWDORQJWKH;D[LV
2. Press the ENTER key to set up the fields as indicated below:
Y: coordinate of the cut along Y

axis.
Y X
Xi: initial coordinate of the cut Y Z

along X axis. prf
Xf: final coordinate of the cut long

Xi
X axis.
Xf
CAM: access to setting of the
technological data fields,
listed below. Xf
Technological item T: name of the

tool. Press ENTER for
Xi
access to the list.
Technological item S: slot

activation. The first field on the left is used to select the number of the slot to
be used during processing; to use another slot simultaneously, select the name
in the second field. If the slots are not selected in the fields, the system
activates the first slot containing the chosen tool, by default.
3. Press the ENTER key on the OK field to confirm the programming; to abort press ESC.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOFXWDORQJWKH<D[LV
X: coordinate of the cut along X

axis.
Y X
Yi: initial coordinate of the cut Z X

along Y axis. prf
Yf: final coordinate of the cut

Yi
long Y axis.
Yf
technological data
fields, listed below. Yf
Technological item T: name of

the tool. Press
Yi
ENTER for access to
the list.
tool, by default.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
9HUWLFDOFXWWLQJZLWKSRVLWLRQLQJE\PHDQVRIWKH&D[LV
2. Press the ENTER key to set up the fields as indicated below:
Xi: initial coordinate of the cut along Xf

the X axis. Xi
Yi: initial coordinate of the cut along
Yf
Yi
the Y axis. Ar
In the Tip field, select the type of

D
data setting used to define
the final part of the cut.
The following is a list of all

the setting types:
XFYF Xf: final coordinate of the cut along the X axis.

Yf: final coordinate of the cut along the Y axis.
XFAR Xf: final coordinate of the cut along the X axis.

Ar: angle of the cut in relation to the side of the panel in
common with the X axis direction.
YFAR Yf: final coordinate of the cut along the Y axis.

DAR D: length of the cut.

Inv: used to invert the direction of advance of the cut. Select Y to invert or N not to invert.
tool, by default.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
6HWWLQJSLHFHWKLFNQHVVWUDFLQJRSHUDWLRQV
Tracing is performed on the piece in order to obtain the co-ordinates of a point, to be referred to
during subsequent programming of working operations. It is normally carried out on pieces with a
shaped and/or not perfectly square outline, using the correction function, or to carry out working in
a specific point on the piece, the position of which depends on the point traced, without using the
correction function.
2. Press ENTER to access the data input function, as described below.
Tip: type of tracer; select | for a vertical tracer, and + for a cross-shaped tracer.
Cor :tracing correction; select S to enable automatic correction, or N to disable it.
L: number of the side of the piece to be traced (this automatically defines the tracing
direction as well).
X: co-ordinate of the point to be traced, along axis X.
Y: co-ordinate of the point to be traced, along axis Y.
Z: co-ordinate of the point to be traced, along axis Z, with respect to side 5 of the panel.
Vel: tracing speed (0.5 to 0.1 m/min).
3. Select Ok and press ENTER to confirm settings. To cancel, press ESC.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
3URJUDPPLQJVWHSV
The “programming steps“ are instructions inserted between the program lines to modify its
execution by adding special functions
The steps are accessed from the EDITOR\ASSISTED page by selecting the instrument and
then the command relating to the step desired. The following is a description of the programming
steps which can be used to create a program.
-XPSLQJDSURJUDPOLQH
This instruction allows the user to set a “condition” which is automatically checked by the NC. If
this condition is met, the program jumps to the line which contains the “label” used in the condition;
if the condition does not occur the program continues normally.
The condition syntax is:
If[…] Is[…] To/than[…] Jump to label[…]
and it instructs the NC:
[if the first value] [is equal, less or greater] [to/than the second value][jump to the label
and continue execution of the program].
The user may set a number of jumps inside the program, using a procedure which depends on the
type of machining programmed. During setting, the user may type the names of the parameters
and formulate expressions.
1. For optimised boring, access the EDITOR\OPTIMISED BORINGS page and select
the command, then set the condition as shown below. For non optimised boring, milling
and cuts, access the EDITOR\ASSISTED page, select the command and then set the
condition, as described below.
2. Select the If.. instruction; the name appears under the last row of icons of the open popup.
3. Press the ENTER key to access setting of the fields as indicated below:
If: type the first value, which is to be checked.
In the next field, select the relational operator.

Select "=" if the first value is to be equal to the second, "" if the first value is to
be smaller than the second, or "" if the first value is to be greater than the
second.
Type the second value, to which the first value is to be referred, in the field below.
Jmp: type the name of the label.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
4. Press the ENTER key on the Ok field to confirm the programming; to abort press ESC.
5. To enter the label, select ; the name appears under the last row of icons of the open
popup.
6. Type the name of the label and press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the programming; to
abort press ESC.
7. Then move the line containing the label to the point desired, as described in page 16 - 2 and
save the program.
/LQHDUWRROPRYHPHQWLQ'
This instruction allows the user to obtain a linear movement with the slot 2 tool, along a straight
line which starts from point PA on which the tool is located and finishes at point PB defined by the
coordinates (referred to the program point of origin). One or more 3D linear movements can be
inserted between the program lines, as described below.
1. From the EDITOR\ASSISTED set the tool with which the movement is to be performed, by
selecting the command .
2. Locate the cursor above the line which is to contain the linear movement, then select the
command .
3. Press ENTER to access setting of the fields, as follows:
tool, by default.
5. Set the coordinates of the point where the linear movement is to end, by selecting the 3D Line
instruction; the name appears under the last row of icons of the open popup.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
6. Press ENTER to access setting of the fields, as follows.
X: coordinate of the point along

the X axis.
Y X
Y: coordinate of the point along PA Z
the Y axis.
Z
Z: coordinate of the point along
the Z axis (with number
“zero” the coordinate X Y
corresponds to the
plane of side 5). PB

interpolation speed.
Interp. Speed: the travel speed of

the tool during the
movement.
8. Save the program.
7HPSRUDU\WUDQVODWLRQRISURJUDPSRLQWRIRULJLQ
This instruction allows the program point of origin to be temporarily shifted. One or more shifts can
be inserted between the program lines, as described below.
1. From the EDITOR\ASSISTED page locate the cursor above the line which is to contain the
move to the point of origin, then select the command.
2. Press ENTER to access setting of the fields, as follows:
Ox: coordinate along the X axis. Y X

Z
Oy: coordinate along the Y axis.
Oz: coordinate along the Z axis. Ox Oz

Oy
3. Press the ENTER key on the Ok field
to confirm the programming; to abort Y X
press ESC.
Z

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
,QWHJUDWLRQRIRSWLPLVHGERULQJ
This instruction allows modification of the sequence of machining operations to be performed;

normally, the NC performs the machining operations programmed from the EDITOR\OPTIMIZED
BORINGS page, that is to say all the optimised boring operations, after which it performs the
machining operations programmed from the EDITOR\ASSISTED page, i.e. non optimised boring,
milling and cutting operations. To integrate optimised boring with the other machining operations,
proceed as indicated below.
integration of the optimised boring, then select the command.
3URJUDPVWRSV
“Stops“ are breaks in the program which allow the operator to change the position of the panel on
the working table. One or more stops can be inserted between the program lines as indicated
below.
suspension, then select the desired command.
suspends processing to move the panel into the other working area,
suspends processing to turn the panel over in the same working area,
suspends processing without releasing the panel, to clean the working area.
2. Then save the program.
INFORMAZIONI
If optimised borings are programmed beyond the value indicated in the X of sosp. field (of the
EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA page), during the START of performance of the program the NC
automatically creates a stop.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
0LQVWUXFWLRQVIRUWKH3/&
The M instructions allow commands to be sent to the PLC for various functions as indicated in the
table which follows.
M 301 Unloading of tool from slot 1.
6HWWLQJVXVHGZKHQZRUNLQJRQVXUIDFH&
If the data field is set to 5C working will be on the thickness of the panel (for example a groove
along the whole edge of the panel). This type of working foresees the use of an aggregate fitted on
an electrospindle (slot) with axis C.
5C
& ;
= <
The main characteristics of this type of machining are the following:
n it is not necessary to program any entry or exit positions, as these are calculated
automatically by the NC;
n in this type of working the NC does not perform any tool radius correction;
n working operations are programmed in the same way as profiles on the XY surface, and can
contain arcs and/or lines;

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
n the profile can change its Z position along a straight side of the panel;
n the profile to be worked can be generated using EGA or CAD;
n the working operations can be performed both on the outside of the panel and inside a
“pocket” in the panel.
8VLQJVXUIDFH&GXULQJ(*$SURJUDPPLQJ
Let us suppose that we want to program the profile illustrated below:
Z Y
The steps to be followed when programming this type of machining operation in EGA are the
following.
1. From the EDITOR\ASSISTED page, select the icon “START WORKING” (green traffic light).
Type in the initial X and Y positions for the new profile, just as you would for the XY
surface.
Select CAM and set 5C in the Plane field.
Set the Depth field, which indicates how far the point of the tool must penetrate the
panel.
Set the Correction field, which in this case does not relate to correction of the tool radius,
but to the tooling position of the aggregate with respect to the profile and its direction of
travel. Therefore, if working is to be in an anti-clockwise direction and the aggregate is to
be positioned on the right of the profile, it will be necessary to set DX in the Correction
field.
Set the In and Out fields, which are strictly dependent on the setting in Correction:
if Correction=DX set In=RA90, Out=RA90
if Correction=SX set In=LA90, Out=LA90

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
it is not necessary to set the field Radius in/out, as this is calculated automatically by the
NC.
It is now possible to close the “CAM” and “Start Work.” pop-up menus, and start adding
elements to the profile.
2. Select the icon “Known Segment End Point”.
Type the final positions X and Y for the segment, just as you would for the XY surface.
Type the value Zs, that is to say the position in Z with respect to surface 5 of the segment
starting point.
Type the value Ze, that is to say the position in Z with respect to surface 5 of the end
point for the segment.
Generally speaking:
if “Zs” is different from “Ze” the segment will be inclined
Zs/Ze
if “Zs” is different from the “Ze” of the previous element, the NC will automatically add a
vertical segment joining the 2 elements
Zs/Ze
if the position in Z of all working operations for the profile has to be constant, the same
position must be repeated in all the “Zs” and “Ze” fields.
3. Select the EGA icon “Arc ...” (one of those available).
Type in the data required for the arc, chosen as if you were working on surface XY.
Type the value “Zs”, that is to say the position in Z with respect to surface 5 of the arc
starting point.
Type the value “Ze” equal to “Zs”, that is to say the position in Z with respect to surface 5
of the end point for the arc.
Generally speaking:
on an arc in 5C the position “Zs” cannot be different from “Ze”, that is to say the arc
cannot be inclined, because otherwise it would be necessary to interpolate axes X, Y, Z
and C.
4. Select the EGA icon “Segment ...” (one of those available).
Type in the data required for the segment, just as you would for the XY surface.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Type the value Zs, that is to say the position in Z with respect to surface 5 of the segment
starting point.
Type the value Ze, that is to say the position in Z with respect to surface 5 of the end
point for the segment.
5. Select the icon “END OF WORKING” (red traffic light).
Generally speaking:
a. The NC adds 2 segments to the programmed profile:
- one at the start of the profile, to perform entry to the programmed depth starting from a
safety position;
-one at the end of the profile, to perform exit from the piece until reaching the safety
position.
b. Entry and exit are perpendicular to the piece at the respective points.
c. The safety position is the one used by horizontal electrospindles (GENERAL DATA - Safety
pos.).
8VHRIVXUIDFH&GXULQJ&$'SURILOHSURJUDPPLQJ
Let us assume that we wish to program the profile illustrated below:
Z Y
1. From the CAD page, create the profile and set the position in Z at which each working
element or all the working elements are to be performed, using the menu Ins I/O.
2. From the EDITOR/ASSISTED page, select the icon for CAD profiles .
Import the profile.
Select CAM and set 5C in the field Plane.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Set the Depth field, which indicates how far the point of the tool must penetrate the
panel.
Set the Correction field, which in this case does not relate to correction of the tool radius,
but to the tooling position of the aggregate with respect to the profile and its direction of
travel. Therefore, if working is to be in an anti-clockwise direction and the aggregate is to
be positioned on the right of the profile, it will be necessary to set DX in the Correction
field.
Set the In and Out fields, which are strictly dependent on the setting in Correction:
if Correction=DX set In=RA90, Out=RA90
if Correction=SX set In=LA90, Out=LA90
it is not necessary to set the field Radius in/out, as it is calculated automatically by the
NC.
Generally speaking:
The NC adds 2 segments to the programmed profile:
- one at the start of the profile, to perform entry to the programmed depth starting from a
safety position;
-one at the end of the profile, to perform exit from the piece until reaching the safety
position.
Entry and exit are perpendicular to the piece at the respective points.
The safety position is the one used by horizontal routers (GENERAL DATA - Safety
pos.).
'RZQORDGLQJH[WHUQDOILOHV
It is possible to download external files having extensions *.CID and *.DXF (2D, gen) as described
below.
1. From the EDITOR\PROGRAM DATA page, select the Files menu.
2. Select the option with the extension corresponding to the file to be opened.
3. Select A: in the Drive field.
4. Select the name of the file to be opened and press ENTER.
5. Press the ENTER key on the Ok field to confirm the operation.
6. Save the program if considered necessary.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
&UHDWLQJWKHZRUNOLVW
The work list is a table which allows the user to organize the machine’s working stages. The list
defines the programs to be used for machining preset quantities of panels. To create a work list,
proceed as follows.
1. From the AUTOMATIC\LIST page, select the Files menu and the New option.
2. Access the list and set fields for each line, as explained below.
Name: name of the program to be executed. To access the program list, press ENTER
on the right-hand side of the field and select the program, then press ENTER
on the Ok field to confirm the operation.
Q: number of panels to be machined with the relative program.
F: do not use; in this field the NC indicates the number of panels which have been
machined during execution of the program.
Comment: in this field the user may type a comment (maximum 10 characters) relating to
the program or enter a “list line jump”.
P: to access the program parameters.
3. To save the list setting, select the Files menu and the Save option.
4. In the File field, type the name of the list (maximum 8 characters).
5. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the operation; the file is automatically created with
extension *.DST.
2SHQLQJPRGLI\LQJDQGVDYLQJWKHZRUNOLVW
1. From the AUTOMATIC\LIST page, select the Files menu and the Open option.
2. Select the name of the list to be opened and press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the operation.
4. Modify the list; to access the menus which allow the user to add, shift, delete or reset a list
line, press the ARROW key and proceed with the operation as described below.
Adding a line to the list. Locate the cursor on the point where the new line is to be
added and select the Ins menu. Then set the added line.
Shifting a line of the list. Locate the cursor on the line to be shifted. Select the Swap
menu, with F3 to shift one line down, or F4 to shift one line up.
Resetting the number of panels machined by a line of the list. Locate the cursor on
the line to be reset and select the Reset menu.

(a211h005.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
3URJUDPPDQDJHPHQW
Deleting a line from the list. Locate the cursor on the line to be deleted and select the
Del menu.
Adding list line jumps. Locate the cursor on the Comment field of the line where the
jump is to start and set using the following syntax:
JMP [name of label]
Then locate the cursor on the Comment field of the line where the jump is to finish, and
type the name of the label.
5. When the modification is complete, save the list. Select the Files menu and the Save option.
6. If the previous name is to be maintained, press ENTER on the Ok field; otherwise, type the
name of the program in the File field (maximum 8 characters).
7. Press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the operation; the file is automatically created with
extension *.DST.
'HOHWLQJWKHZRUNOLVW
1. From the AUTOMATIC\LIST page, select the Files menu and the Delete option to delete a
chosen list, or the Del. all option to delete all the lists in the NC memory at the same time.
2. Select the name of the list to be deleted and press ENTER on the Ok field to confirm the
operation, or ESC to abort.

(a211h005.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 0DQDJHPHQWRI,62
SURJUDPPLQJ
This chapter describes the procedures that enable use of the programs, subprograms and cycles
created in ISO language using other numerical controls, following with the CNI-ISO type
instructions (see Appendix A. “CNI-ISO programming instructions”).
,QWHUSUHWLQJSURJUDPVDQGVXESURJUDPV
This procedure is carried out to transform the ISO programs and subprograms into PAN programs,
in order to use them for machining of the pieces.
1. From the ISO INTERPRETER page select the menu Files, the option Programs or
Subprograms and Open.
2. Press ENTER to access the list. Move the cursor to the name of the program/subprogram to
be opened, and press ENTER.
3. To modify the content of a program line, press the backspace key on the PC keyboard. To
add a line select the menu Add. To delete a line select the menu Del. To move quickly to a
given line select the menu Line, type the line number and press ENTER on the OK field. To
modify a program line it is necessary to know ISO programming language, and to consult the
CNI-ISO instructions, enclosed as an appendix to this manual.
4. Select the menu Interp and wait until interpretation has been completed.
5. Select the menu ISO-PAN. At this point the ISO program has been transformed. Before using
it as a normal PAN program it must be saved. To do this, select, in this order, the menus Edit
P and Files, then the option Open.
$X[LOLDU\IXQFWLRQVIRU,62H[SUHVVLRQV
In order to translate CNI-ISO programs correctly, the NC expression evaluator will also interpret
the following functions:
_C(x) = cosine of x;
_S(x) = sine of x;
_T(x) = tangent of x;
_A(x) = arch tangent of x;
_R(x) = square root of x;
_I(x) = whole part of x;

(a235h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
0DQDJHPHQWRI,62SURJUDPPLQJ
_B(x = absolute value of x;

_D(s) = length of string s.

(a235h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU 0DQDJHPHQWRIVWDWLVWLFV
Statistics is an environment in which information on machine and operator events is recorded, in

order to check productivity and reliability. For each event it is possible to record the duration and
the number of times it occurs. This chapter deals with questions relating to “production statistics”.
As regards “machine and/or reliability statistics” please contact the BIESSE Service Department.
Each question relating to statistics, that is to say the various settings, programming operations,
enable/disable operations, etc., take the STATISTICS EDITOR page as their basic reference. To
access this page, from the MANUAL page, select the menu Stat and the option Editor.
Information on name of statistics files
Each time the current statistics file is stopped, it is automatically saved and stored in the
software memory. Each statistics file is coded using the date and time of the day on
which the stoppage occurred. The information contained in the code or name of each
statistics file is indicated in the following example.
3
Type of statistics file

(P=production, M=machine)
Year (in this case: 1999)
Month (in this case: June)
Day (in this case: the third day of the month)
Time (in this case: 15 indicates the hours, 49 the minutes)
3URFHGXUHIRUXVHRIVWDWLVWLFV
The following information is intended to provide the operator with a general outlook on the use of
statistics. The following are the various stages in use of statistics.

(a231h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
0DQDJHPHQWRIVWDWLVWLFV
1. Set the term for storage of statistics and the operator’s identification data.
2. Define which events are to be included in the statistics.
3. Enable statistics mode, after which mark the start and end of each single event.
4. Disable statistics mode when necessary.
6HWWLQJWKHWHUPIRUVWRUDJH
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR press the ARROW button and select the menu Setup.
2. Position the cursor on the left hand part of the data field Production stat and select the item Y
(yes), to accept storage of production statistics.
3. Position the cursor on the right hand part of the data field Production stat and set the term for
storage of the statistics using one of the following items.
Manual: allows the user to decide when to stop storage of the current statistics file (using
the menu StopS).
Daily: allows the statistics to be saved at the end of each day. To set, press ENTER and
select the time in the data field. If the machine is switched off before this time,
storage will take place as soon as it is switched on again after the time set.
Weekly: allows the statistics to be saved at the end of each week. To set, press ENTER
and select the day and time in the relative data fields. If the machine is
switched off before this time, storage will take place as soon as it is switched
on again after the day and time set.
Monthly: allows the statistics to be saved at the end of each month. To set, press
ENTER and select the day number (from 1 to 31) and time in the relative data
fields. If the machine is switched off before this time, storage will take place as
soon as it is switched on again after the day and time set.
INFORMAZIONI
After each storage operation the software automatically starts another statistics file with the same
settings, except in the case of "Manual" mode, when the StopS menu must be selected.
4. Press ENTER on the command field SAVE to confirm the setting.

(a231h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
6HWWLQJWKHRSHUDWRULGHQWLILFDWLRQGDWD
INFORMAZIONI
Always input the data for each operator in the same way, using the same capitals/lower case
letters, spaces, etc.. Even the slightest difference will be considered a new operator, and the
relative statistics cannot be corrected or transferred to the right operator at a later date.
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu Oper and set the data fields.
Serial number: type the operator serial number (obligatory).
Name: type the name of the operator.
Shift: type the shift number.
2. Press ENTER on the command field OK to confirm the setting.
3URJUDPPLQJHYHQWV
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR select the table OPERATOR and press ENTER to allow
setting of the events.
2. Position the cursor on the line for the event required, or on an empty line, and type the name
of the new event. The items that appear initially in the table are preset by BIESSE. For each
line, set the data fields in the following columns.
Att: allows the event to be included in or excluded from the statistics file being enabled.
Select the item Y to include the event in the statistics file, or select N to exclude
the event.
TpE: allows the event data detection mode to be defined.

Select the item TT to detect the duration only, the item QQ to detect only the
number of times the event occurs, select the item QT to detect both the
duration and the number of times the event occurs.
TpS: allows the type of statistics file in which the event is to be stored to be defined.
Select the item MM to store in machine statistics only, the item PP to store in
production statistics only, the item MP to store both in machine statistics and in
production statistics.
3. To confirm the setting, select the menu Change. Answer the question by pressing ENTER on
Yes.

(a231h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
(QDEOLQJVWDWLVWLFV
From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu StartS and the option Mac + Prod to enable
both statistics (machine and production), or the option Machine to enable machine statistics only,
or the option Production to enable production statistics only.
INFORMAZIONI
After enabling statistics the operator must remember to mark each programmed event.
0DUNLQJHYHQWV
This procedure is essential in order to achieve maximum precision in statistics data. Each event
that occurs requires the participation of the operator, who must mark (indicate) the starting time
and the end time.
Example of marking
Let us suppose that we have enabled production statistics that include the following events:
n tooling,
n programming,
n control of machining operations,
n break,
n material finished.
First of all, at the start of each working shift the operator must input his identification data. After
this, when he has to tool-up the machine to perform a new machining operation, before proceeding
he must mark the "start of tooling", then when tooling is completed he must mark the "end of
tooling". Then, if the material to be machined is finished, before getting a new supply the operator
must mark the "start of material finished" and after getting a new supply and positioning it close to
the machine he must mark the "end of material finished". If, during machining, the operator
decides to create or modify a program he must mark the "start of programming". If the operator
decides to take a break he must mark the "start of break". At the end of the break the operator
must mark the "end of break". Then, when creation of the program has been completed, he must
mark the "end of programming", and so on and so forth for all the events that take place until the
end of his working shift.
To mark an event after enabling statistics mode, proceed as follows.
1. To mark the start of the event, from the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu
Commands.
2. Press ENTER to access the list and select the event required. At this point, press ENTER to
confirm marking of the start of event.

(a231h001.fm-250200)
&KDSWHU
3. When the event finishes, to mark the end of the event, select the menu Stop Com from the
STATISTICS EDITOR page.
5HDOWLPHXSGDWLQJRIFXUUHQWVWDWLVWLFVILOH
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu StatP.
2. Select the menu File and the option Current.
*UDSKLFGLVSOD\RIVWDWLVWLFV
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu StatP.
2. Update the statistics (see paragraph 18.7 “Real-time updating of current statistics file”).
3. Select the menu GrafP.
'LVDEOLQJVWDWLVWLFV
From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu StopS and the option Mac + Prod to disable
both statistics (machine and production), or the option Machine to disable machine statistics only,
or the option Production to disable production statistics only.
2SHQLQJDQGUHDGLQJVWDWLVWLFV
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu StatP for production statistics or StatM
for machine statistics.
2. Select the menu File and the option Open. Press ENTER to access the list. Select the name
of the statistics file and press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER on the field OK to confirm selection and open the statistics file.
4. Select the upper table and press ENTER to access.
5. Position the cursor on the line required and press ENTER. All the information contained will
be exploded in the lower table.

(a231h001.fm-250200)

&KDSWHU
'HOHWLQJVWDWLVWLFV
1. From the STATISTICS EDITOR page, select the menu StatP for production statistics or StatM
for machine statistics.
2. Select the menu File and the option Delete to delete the statistics file required, or the option
Del all to delete all the statistics in the software memory simultaneously.
3. Select the name of the statistics file to be deleted and press ENTER on the field OK to
confirm the operation.

(a231h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGLFHV

(a306h001.fm-250200)
(a306h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$ &1,,62SURJUDPPLQJ
LQVWUXFWLRQV
The following paragraphs summarise all instructions used for the CNI-ISO programming language.
These paragraphs may serve as a rapid guide.
$ /LVWRI,QVWUXFWLRQV
The following table contains all CNI-ISO instructions. The instructions are in alphabetical order;
next to the syntax there is a brief description of the function performed and the number of the
section where it is described.
Syntax Meaning
% end of a program and of a subroutine
%% immediate exit from the program
: label block identifier (label)
AR [= ]expr horizontal angle of spindle orientation
axis[= ]expr axis position assignment
axis I [= ]expr axis position increment
axis O [= ]expr axis origin movement
AZ [= ]expr vertical angle of spindle orientation
BA [= ]expr line inclination angle, arc width
BL [= ]expr current step length
BM [= ]expr step for rounding
BR [= ]expr step linked to subsequent in two dimensions
BS [+j- ] step secant to the next
BT [+j- ] step tangent to the next
D [= ]expr delay
E axis[= ]expr axis acceleration
E [= ]expr acceleration of interpolated axes
F axis[= ]expr axis speed assignment
F [= ]expr speed of interpolated axes

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
&1,,62SURJUDPPLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
Syntax Meaning
G [= ]expr G modal instruction
HC [= ]expr Head configuration number
Iaxis[= ]expr declaration of advance axis arrival
I [= ]expr X-coordinate of circumference center
J [= ]expr ordinate of circumference center
JM: expr unconditional jump instruction
JM [! ]( expr ): expr conditional jump instruction
JP [! ]( expr1 , expr2 ): expr3 PLC byte controlled conditional jump instruction
K [= ]expr circumference center height
L= routine Call of external subroutine
L: expr Call of internal subroutine
LO: [expr] call for drilling section subroutine
LS [= ]expr$ Indirect call of external subroutine
LX [= ]expr Piece length
LY [= ]expr Piece width
LZ [= ]expr Piece thickness
M [= ]expr "M" type instruction for the passage of variables and
commands to the PLC
parm = expr Parameter assignment
parm = expr$ Alphanumeric parameter assignment
R [= ]expr Circumference radius assignment (helix)
RI [= ]expr assignment of the semiaxis of an ellipse parallel to the
X-coordinate
RJ [= ]expr assignment of the semiaxis of an ellipse parallel to the
ordinate
RP [= ]expr Step repetition number
RT [= ]expr Rotation angle value
RTI [= ]expr Value increment of the rotation angle
RTO [= ]expr Origin of rotation angle
S [= ]expr Assignment of spindle speed
S axis[= ]expr axis scale factor assignment
SF [= ]expr Total axis scale factor
T axis[= ]expr Tracer parameter assignment for the X-axis
$ BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
Syntax Meaning
T [= ]spindle[: ]tool[, spindle ,... ] select vertical spindles
T [= ]expr[: expr]
T [= ]expr$
T [= ]expr :< expr tool assignment to vertical spindle
T [= ]expr :< expr$
TH [= ]spindle[: tool][, spindle ,... ] select horizontal spindles
TH [= ]expr[: expr]
TH [= ]expr$
TH [= ]expr :< expr tool assignment to horizontal spindle
TH [= ]expr :< expr$
TP [= ]spindle[: tool][, spindle ,... ] select pantograph spindles
TP [= ]expr[: expr]
TP [= ]expr$
TP [= ]expr :< expr tool assignment to pantograph spindle
TP [= ]expr :< expr$

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
'HVFULSWLRQRILQVWUXFWLRQTXDOLILHUV
array vector name: maximum 3 alphanumeric characters

axis axis name: maximum 2 alphanumeric characters
expr expression with numeric result
expr$ expression with alphanumeric result
label label number: maximum 2 decimal figures
remark comment description
n decimal figure (0,1,...,9)
nn integer constant maximum 2 decimal figures
nnnn integer constant maximum 4 decimal figures
nnnnn integer constant maximum 5 decimal figures
routine subroutine name: maximum 11 alphanumeric characters
parm parameter name (numeric or alphanumeric): maximum 3
alphanumeric characters
spindle spindle number: maximum 3 decimal figures
tool tool number: maximum 3 decimal figures
$ 0RGDOLQVWUXFWLRQ*
The syntax of this instruction is:
G[=]expr
where: expr is an expression with a numeric result.
These instructions are defined "modal" as they generally indicate the modality of operation of a
movement step, or the manner of interpreting certain program data. The following instructions are
available:
G0 * Movement independent of programmed speed axes. Reset by: G1, G2, G3, G4, G5,
G6, G7, G8 G9, G10, G11.
G1 Linear interpolated movement with programmed speed. Reset by: G0, G2, G3, G4, G5,
G6, G7, G8 G9, G10, G11.
G2 Clockwise Anticlockwise circular interpolated movement with programmed tangential speed,

with given centre co-ordinates. Reset by: G0, G1, G3, G4, G5, G6, G7, G8 G9, G10,
G11.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
G3 Anticlockwise Clockwise circular interpolated movement with programmed tangential speed,

with given centre co-ordinates. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G4, G5, G6, G7, G8, G9,
G10, G11.
G4 Clockwise Anticlockwise circular interpolated movement with programmed tangential speed,

with given radius. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G5, G6, G7, G8, G9, G10, G11.
G5 Anticlockwise Clockwise circular interpolated movement with programmed tangential speed,

with given radius. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G4, G6, G7, G8 G9, G10, G11.
G6 Circular interpolated movement with programmed tangential speed, tangential to previous

movement. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G7, G8, G9, G10, G11.
G7 Clockwise Anticlockwise elliptical interpolated movement with programmed angular speed, with
given semi-axes and centre co-ordinates. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, G8,
G9, G10, G11.
G8 Anticlockwise Clockwise elliptical interpolated movement with programmed angular speed, with
given semi-axes and centre co-ordinates. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, G7,
G9, G10, G11.
G9 Circular interpolated movement in space, less than 180 degrees, with programmed tangential
speed, with given center. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, G7, G8, G10,
G11.
G10 Circular interpolated movement in space, greater than 180 degrees, with programmed
tangential speed, with given center. Reset by: G0, G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, G7, G8,
G9, G11.
G11 Circular interpolated movement in space, with given intermediate point. Reset by: G0, G1,
G2, G3, G4, G5, G6, G7, G8, G9, G10.
G27 Commands the axes to arrest upon movement end, for non-tangential steps, without waiting
for the target co-ordinates to be reached, within positioning tolerance.
G28 Commands the axes to slow down upon movement end, for non-tangential steps, function of
the angle formed with the successive step.
G30 * Used to set a functioning mode for instruction Iaxis [=]expr . In such mode, the programmed
advance is active only in the step in which it is programmed with the allocation involved. The
programmed advance resets automatically after use. Reset by instruction G31.
G31 Used to set a functioning mode for instruction Iaxis [=]expr . In such mode, the programmed
advance stays active until it is reprogrammed.
G40 Cancellation of tool radius correction. Reset by: G41, G42.
G41 Tool radius correction on the left right of the profile. Reset by: G40, G42.
G42 Tool radius correction on the right left of the profile. Reset by: G40, G41.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
G46 Commands the axes to arrest upon movement end, for non-tangential steps, while
maintaining the attainment of the target co-ordinates within the positioning tolerance. Reset
by G47, G27, G28.
G47 Avoids arrest or slowing of the axes on sharp edges formed between non-tangential steps.
Reset by G46, G27, G28.
G48 C axis in independent rotation. Axis not interpolated tangentially. Can be interpolated with
other axes in standard modes.
G49 C rotation axis in tangential interpolation. Axis follows tangent of trajectory followed by X and
Y axes. If starting direction does not coincide with position of C, rotate to align. This function is
active by default. Reset by G48.
G50
G51 Tool automatic input. Reset at step end.
G52 Tool automatic output. Reset at step end.
G53 Deactivation of tool corrections and origin movement The axes position value and the
circumference centre and ellipsis are referred to the machine origin. Reset by G54.
G54 Activation of the tool corrections and origin movements. Reset by G53.
G55 Deactivation of tool corrections on all axes. Reset by G56 or by G54.
G56 Reactivation of tool corrections on all axes.
G58 Origin movement inside the piece. Reset by G59.
G59 Origin movement external to the piece. Next origin movements will be relative to the origin
selected by the PLC, or they can be absolute (referred to the machine origin), according to
activation of G54 or G53. Reset by G58.
G60 Definition of independent program flow.
G61 Used to await physical positioning of all axes on which a mode G60 has been programmed.
G62 # Reset by G63.
G66 # Activates simultaneous start of more than one independent cycles.
G67 Forcing of end of cycle of all open cycles. Good only at step in which programmed. If
programmed at step without open cycles, has no effect.
G68 Input of circular connection step in C.R.U. between non-tangential convex steps. Reset by
G69.
G69 * Intersection of the trajectories corrected in C.R.U. (if possible). Reset by G68.
G70 Input of data in inches (only at the beginning of the program)

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
G71 * Data input in mm (only at the beginning of the program)
G74 Disables use of origin definition data for all axes. Reset by G75 or by G54.
G75 * Reactivates use of origin definition data for all axes. Reset by G74.
G77 * Resets programmed action with instruction G78.
G78 When calculating tool working position, declares active contribution of spindle corrector only.
Reset by G77 or by G54.
G79 Activation of external tool compensation.
G80 * Deactivation of external tool compensation.
G81 Activation of external roto-translation.
G82 * Activation of external roto-translation.
G83 * Activation of spindle reference system.
G84 * Deactivation of spindle reference system.
The symbol (*) indicates the active functions at the beginning of the program. The symbol (#)
refers to further information in the following chapters. The symbol ($) marks the instructions G
dedicated to applications with master-slave axes. These instructions are active only after having
declared one or more slave axes through the instruction AX. For example, to declare the C axis
slave of the X axis in cam mode with speed connector, the following must be programmed:
N10 AX=X:C,... G100
This type of instruction G is optional and is therefore active only in special software versions.
$ ([SUHVVLRQV
The syntax of some instructions contains terms like expr and expr$ for the use of expressions
including a numeric as well as an alphanumeric result.
In most real cases such expressions only include a constant, nevertheless the possibility of
assigning a value contained in an expression increases the programming capability, and in many
cases it allows to simplify the compilation of a program or of part of it.
In addition to this, it is possible to assign parameter and vector expressions. This is useful for
keeping the value of an expression which occurs often, or to make checks on the program.
One can write mathematical, alphanumeric or mixed expressions, with constants and parameters
(according to the limits specified below).
The result of an expression will be alphanumeric or numeric, according to the operands and
operations performed . It is often possible to use the syntax of an instruction, as a factor or
addendum, within an expression, i.e. as a parameter. In this case, when the NC interprets the
expression, the syntax of the instruction is substituted with its last programmed value.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
For example: supposing that the last programmed values in the instructions X and F are,
respectively, 100 and 50.
The expression: AAA=F+X would be interpreted by the NC as: AAA=100+50.
The following instructions cannot be utilised as parameters within an expression: N, L, LC, LO,
LS, JM, JP, T, TH, TP, TS, AX, MS, RP, RTI, BS, BT, RDM, FREF.
$ &RQVWDQWV
There are two types of constants; numeric and alphanumeric. Both can be used for writing
expressions.
1XPHULFFRQVWDQWV
A numeric constant is a sequence of decimal figures that may be preceded by a ‘ ‘ +" o ‘ ‘ -", sign
and may include a decimal point ‘ ‘ .". Scientific notation is also permitted. The following are valid
examples of numeric constants:
0, 9999, 0123, .003, -0.0, +123, 999.99, 001.23, -10, 123e2,

99999.9999, 00000.0123
The following are not valid constants:
0.0.0, 123A2
Numeric constants can also include the final characters ‘ ‘ P" and ‘ ‘ M" that indicates a quantity in
inches and a quantity in millimetres respectively. This characteristic allows you to directly write the
amounts read from a drawing without converting them to the unit of measure of the program.
For example, in case of a program in millimetres, the constant 12.345P (inches) is equivalent to
313.56 (millimetres) and this last value is the one that is actually used, i.e. the constant 12.345P is
converted right after its reading, and everything is exactly as if it were the constant 313.56.
Similarly, in case of a program in inches, the constant 63.12M (millimetres) is equivalent to 2.485
(inches), and also in this case, it is the last value to be actually used.
Obviously, millimetre constants in programs with millimetres, are not converted and this also
happens for inch constants in programs with inches.
When writing subroutines that can be used in programs with inches or millimetres, it is necessary
that all the numeric constants referring to dimensions or displacements are defined with the
relative postfixed symbol, so that the unit of measure can be forced.
It is also possible to write octal constants with a maximum of 3 figures to facilitate the writing of
expressions referring to an address in the PLC memory area. To do this, put the symbol "\" before
the numerical characters; i.e. the octal constant \53 equals 43 decimal. As opposed to decimal
constants, a unit of measurement specifier cannot follow an octal constant.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$OSKDQXPHULFFRQVWDQWV
An alphanumeric constant or string is a sequence of max. 64 characters, excluding the characters

‘ ‘ @’’ and line-feed, between brackets; for example "STRING".
You can also insert blank characters in a string, but you must pay attention to the fact that they are
considered just as any other character, so, for example, two strings "A B C" and " A B C ", with 5
and 7 characters respectively, are different.
The string "" is the zero string and is equivalent to the 0 in numeric constants.
$ 3DUDPHWHUVDQGYHFWRUV
As with the constants, there are two possible types of parameters: numeric and alphanumeric.
1XPHULFSDUDPHWHUV
A numeric parameter is defined with a name created according to the following rules:
n beginning with the letter P and formed by a maximum of 4 alphanumeric characters. (The
name of a parameter must not necessarily begin with the letter P, however, it is helpful. A
widening of the set of programming instructions may mean that the syntax of some new
instructions coincides with the names of parameters used in the normal work programs or
fixed cycles. In this case the NC produces an error message that can only be eliminated by
changing the names of the parameters. This unfortunate possibility will not occur if the name
of the parameter begins with the letter P.)
n It cannot coincide with the name of an instruction.
n It cannot coincide with the name of an axis followed by ‘ ‘ I’’ ‘ ‘ O’’ or preceded by ‘ ‘ E’’ ‘ ‘ F’’ ‘ ‘ I’’
‘ ‘ S’’ and ‘ ‘ T’’
The following, for example, are correct names for numeric parameters:
PAAA, PBBB, PD1;
The following are incorrect names for numeric parameters:
XI, FY.
The numeric parameter allocation is followed by:
parm =expr
the equal sign is necessary. For example: PAA=3*1 or PB1=25

The first instruction of allocation to a numeric parameter, no matter where, automatically
determines its creation, unless there is no more room available.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
The value of a not yet assigned numerical parameter used in an expression is 0.

The allocation of a string result to a numeric parameter causes an error.
INFORMAZIONI
CNI reserves the right to extend its set of production instructions at any time. In the event of
installing a new version NC, it must be checked if the set of programming instructions has been
modified.
If this is the case, ensure that the working programs used do not contain parameters, whose name
do not start with the letter P, which coincide with the letter of one of the new instructions
introduced.
$OSKDQXPHULFSDUDPHWHUV
Only 10 predefined alphanumeric parameters can be used:

ST0, ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5, ST6, ST7, ST8, ST9.
Among these parameters, parameter ST0 is used in a special way: it is preloaded at the start of
the program with the contents of field COMMENT on the list line.
The numeric parameter allocation is followed by:
parm=expr$
the equal sign is necessary.

For example:
ST1="PIPPO 1 34".
The initial value of an alphanumeric parameter is "" (string zero).
6SHFLDOSDUDPHWHUV
The following are special parameters meant for special use and they are predefined:
n workpiece dimensions,
n workpiece work origin,
n work list parameters,
n tool change parameters,
n reference spindle parameters,
n parking value,
n sampling value.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
Workpiece dimensions
LPX Workpiece length
LPY Workpiece width
LPZ Workpiece thickness
These parameters are meant for the dimensions of the piece to process. Their value is
preset through instructions LX, LY and LZ. The piece dimensions can be used at any
point of the program without the necessity of allocation.
Workpiece work origin
ORGX X co-ordinate origin of work program.
ORGY Y co-ordinate origin of work program.
ORGZ Z co-ordinate origin of work program.
ORTX, ORTY, ORTZ Type of origin of work program. Possible values for this parameter
are:
0: straight
1: specular
2: translated
3: specular translated
Consult the paragraph A.3.8 “Origins” of this manual.
Parking value PRK
The PRK parameter is a special parameter whose value is defined in the machine data
(AXIS DATA) next to the message: PARKING VALUE. The PRK is often useful, during the
programming phase, when an axis not involved in operations, has to be moved to a
value where it is certain not to disturb the other axes
Assignment of the PRK is programmed as follows:
axis=PRK
axisI=PRK
axisO=PRK
The PRK can also be used inside an expression:
X=PRK-23
The use of PRK on an axis is not allowed in case of main couple when axis rotation is
active, or when a geometrical blockage is not as yet defined. The PRK cannot be
modified by the program. The PRK can be assigned to an axis indirectly via a parameter.
For example:
N10 AAA=PRK ...

...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
...
N50 X=AAA ...
The special nature of this assignment consists in the fact that the value of PRK defined in
the machine data (which depends on the axis involved) is not assigned to parameter
AAA. Rather, the parameter status in alias_PRK is changed. The parameter that has
become alias_PRK may be used in expressions exactly as if it were PRK, and differs
from it only to the extent that it can "regain" parameter status simply by assigning it a
"normal" expression, i.e., without PRK or alias_PRK. The indirect assignment of
parameter PRK is particularly useful when it is inserted in subprograms or internal
subroutines.
$ 2SHUDWRUVDQGIXQFWLRQV
The operators and functions listed below may be used to write expressions:
+ addition
- subtraction, sign inversion
* multiplication
/ division
% module
^ raising to a power
<? less than between two operands
>? greater than between two operands
< less than
> greater than
= equal to
>=, => greater than or equal to
<=, =< less than or equal to
<>, >< different from
! logical negation
~ and logic
# or logic

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
_B absolute value
_R square root
_S sine
_C cosine
_T tangent
_A arctangent
_M vector module
_I integer
_D length of string
_V string value
_H ASCII code
3ULRULW\DQGDVVRFLDWLRQOHYHOV
There are priority levels and association directions; these are arranged as indicated in the table..
Priority Operator description Symbols Association

direction
8 unary operators, functions (+, -, !, _f, $f) sx ⇐ dx
7 raise to the power of (^) sx ⇐ dx
6 multiplication, division, module (*, /, %) sx ⇒ dx
5 addition, subtraction (+, -) sx ⇒ dx
4 selection operators (<?, >?) sx ⇒ dx
3 relational operators (=, >, <, …) sx ⇒ dx
2 and (logic multiplication) (~) sx ⇒ dx
1 or (logic addition) (#) sx ⇒ dx
where:
sx ⇒ dx means association from left to right.
sx ⇐ dx means association from right to left.
The operations (functions) with highest priority are executed first, those with lowest priority are
executed last. Association determines the direction in which the sequences of operations
(functions) that have the same priority will be executed. Priority and association, described in Table
2.3, can be modified by means of the use of parentheses:
n An open parenthesis "(" block start with higher priority,

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
n A closed parenthesis ")" end of block with higher priority,
It is possible to keep up to 20 operations pending.
$ULWKPHWLFRSHUDWRUV
The principal arithmetic operators are: addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), division (/).
These operators are associated from left to right. Multiplication and division have the same priority,
which is greater than the priority of addition and subtraction.
Inversion of sign
Sign inversion (-) changes the sign of the operand that follows. It may be associated from
left to right, cancelling in pairs.
Module
The module (%) operation calculates the remainder after the division between two
operands (including non-integer). The value given by A%B is A- n x B, where n is the
quotient of A/B, rounded to a integer number, towards zero. The dividend and remainder
have the same sign.
Raising to power
The operation of raising to power is (^). The exponent can also be fractional, provided
that the base is greater than zero. The association is from right to left, therefore:A^B^C is
equal to A^(B^C).
5HODWLRQDORSHUDWRUV
Relational operators are: <, >, =, >=, =>, <=, =<, <>, ><.
These can be applied to two operands both numeric or alphanumeric, and they give a result equal
to 1 when the relation is true, or 0 otherwise.
In case of alphanumeric operands, see selection operators for the results of comparison.
Relational operators have association from left to right, nevertheless such association can hardly
be used for practical purposes.
In fact, 0< A< 2 does not give the result "TRUE" if the A value is exactly between 0 and 2, as one
would expect, but it always gives value 1 (TRUE), as the result of the comparison 0< A, no matter
whether true or false, is always less than 2. In the case considered, the correct formulation would
be0< A~ A< 2.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
/RJLFDORSHUDWRUV
Logical negation
The logical negation (!) can be applied to any operand, both numeric or alphanumeric
and it gives a result equal to 1 if the operand value is 0 or the string value is 0, or it is
equal to 0 otherwise.
And and Or logic
The And (~) and Or (#) can be applied to any two operands and they give a result in
integer format equal to 1 or 0. The And has the result 0 if at least one of the two operand
values or the string is 0, otherwise the value 1 will return. The Or gives the result 1 if at
least one of the two operands is not 0 or the null string; otherwise, it gives 0.
1XPHULFDOIXQFWLRQV
Numerical functions are:
_B, _R, _S, _C, _T, _A, _M, _I, _E, _N.
These functions can be applied only to two operands of numeric type. Association is from right to
left.
Absolute value
The absolute value function (_B) gives the value of its argument with plus sign. For
example: _B(-4) gives a value of 4.
Square root
The square root function (_R) gives a value that, if multiplied by itself, gives the initial
value. The subject cannot be negative. For example: _R(4) gives a value of 2.
Sine, cosine and tangent
The functions sine (_S) cosine (_C) and tangent (_T)always have an argument
expressed in sixtieths of a degree, so, for example, a 20 degree and 30 minute angle will
have to be set in the following form: 20.5
Arctangent
The arctangent function (_A) gives a result expressed in sixtiesths of a degree between
-90 and +90. If two arguments are given, an angle between -180 and 180 degrees is
calculated. This is the angle that the vector forms with the positive direction of x, and has
the first argument in y and the second in x.
Vector module
The vector module function (_M) gives a value equal to the length of the vector that has
the function arguments as components.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
For example: _M(3,4) gives a value of 5.
Integer
The integer function(_I) always has a result in integer format with a value equal to the
largest integer number that is not greater than the operand.
For example: 3 gives 3; 3.7 also gives a result of 3; _I-3.7 gives -4.
$OSKDQXPHULFQXPHULFFRQYHUVLRQIXQFWLRQ
Conversion functions are: _D, _V, _H, $S, $C. These functions have numeric results starting
from alphanumeric subjects and vice versa.
String length
The length of string function(_D) has an integer result, the value of which corresponds
to the number of characters of the specified string.
String value
The string value function (_V)gives a result equal to the numeric constant expressed by
the characters of the specified string. The same rules apply as for numeric constants,
and especially those for conversion of units of measurement. For example, in a program
in millimetres, the expression_V"12.345P" gives the result 313.56 .
$ 3URJUDPPLQJ
A valid program line must always start with one of these four characters: : , % , ; , N.
The end of a line is identified with a line-feed, provided it is not preceded by the character @. This
character is linked up to the following line, thus forming a single line.
$ /DEHOV
A line starting with the character ":" contains a label, and cannot contain other instructions.
$ (QGRISURJUDPRUVXEURXWLQH
A line containing "%" as a single character, indicates the end of the program or of a subroutine. A
line that only contains the characters "%%" determines the immediate end of the program,
independently of the current nesting level.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$ &RPPHQWV
A line starting with the character ";" is completely ignored, regardless of its content. Nevertheless,
it is displayed during the execution of the program. This can be useful to insert some comments in
the program, or some lines with clear indications to be able to facilitate following of the program
flow.
$ 3URJUDPVWHSV
The lines starting with the character N are the actual ‘ ‘ steps" of the program. The N is in fact the
instruction of the ‘ ‘ step number", whose syntax is as follows:
N[=]nnnn
where nnnn is any whole number between 0 and 2147483647.
The step number of a line can be used to start the program execution of the program from a
particular line, rather than from the beginning. In addition, it is useful for following the execution of
the program in automatic. Such numbers should then be different from step to step and be in
ascending order.
The various instructions in a program step, are separated from one another by one or more blank
characters. Such characters cannot be used for any other purpose, so they cannot come between
the name of an instruction and its data, nor inside an expression, apart from the case where it is
inside a constant string, i.e. in inverted commas " ".
Comments may also be inserted in lines containing instructions by putting the character ";" first.
Obviously, the comment must be put after the last instruction for the step and must be separated
from it by at least one blank..
The end of a step may be conditioned by putting a conditional expression in parentheses first.For
example, in the line:
N10 ... (expr) ...
the part of the line following (expr) is considered only if expr is true, i.e., other than 0.
$ /LQHUHSHWLWLRQV
The same line may be repeated by means of instruction:
RP[=]expr
The value of the expression is converted to the integer immediately preceding it, and gives the
number of repetitions of the line. Zero or negative values generate an error condition.
During execution of the program, the repeated lines (except for the first) are displayed together
with a number in parentheses that indicates how many lines (including that line) are still to be
executed. For example, program line: N10 RP4 will cause the following display:

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
N10 RP4
N10 RP4 [3]
N10 RP4 [2]
N10 RP4 [1]
$ 8QLWVRIPHDVXUHPHQW
The system is programmed in either inches or millimetres; when the system is switched on, the
unit of measurement automatically set is the millimetre. Nevertheless, it is possible to write
programs entirely in inches even when the set unit of measurement is millimetres or to insert
displacements in inches in programs with millimetres or viceversa.
3URJUDPPLQJLQPLOOLPHWUHVRULQLQFKHV
To select inch programming, the G70 modal instruction is used. To select millimetre programming,
the G71 modal instruction is used.
Instructions G70 and G71 must be inserted in the main program before any expression. In fact, the
first expression evaluation implies the automatic setting of the unit of measure If the instructions
G70or G71 have not been programmed, the default unit of measurement is selected.
After the setting of the unit of measurement, it remains fixed even for all the subroutines used and
up to the end of the program, and any further G70 and G71 will be ignored.
$ $[HV
Each axis is indicated by a name containing a maximum of 3 alphanumeric characters. The first
character must be a letter.
In addition to this, on indicating the general name of an axis with axis there must be no
coincidence with the name of any other instruction:
axis - instruction of absolute positioning

axisI - instruction of incremental positioning
axisO - instruction of change of origin
Faxis - instruction of speed assignment
Saxis - instruction of scale factor assignment
Eaxis - instruction of acceleration assignment
Iaxis- instruction of advance axis arrival
Taxis - instruction of sampling device level
If, for example, the system is actually equipped with 16 axes, whose names, determined in a
specific file, are as follows:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9;
with which the following instructions are associated:

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
XI, XO, FX, SX, EX, IX, TX; YI, YO, ... SA8, EA8, IA8, TA8; A9I,
A9O, FA9, SA9, EA9, IA9, TA9.
$ 2ULJLQV
The following are several reference systems, according to the various origins one can have:
n Absolute or machine origin,
n External or piece origin,
n Internal or program origin.
$EVROXWHRUPDFKLQHRULJLQ
This is a preferential point defined for each axis by the machine constructor via a machine
parameter, setting its position according to the point used by the system for carrying out the axis
automatic zero setting.
([WHUQDORUSLHFHRULJLQ
These are the points related to the absolute origin, on which the piece to be machined can be
positioned with precision through pushing against the appropriate stops. The piece origin must
then be selected by the operator among the fixed origins available in the machine parameters,
before executing the program. It is also possible to assign any value from the whole program
through an instruction of external origin change.
3URJUDPRULQWHUQDORULJLQ
This origin is relative to the piece origin active at the moment, and by default it coincides with the
last one. It is possible to change it through the instructions of internal change of origin. All the
program relative displacements (non absolute ones) are referred to the internal origin, so the
change of internal origin is equal to the program translation with regard to the piece.
&KDQJHRIRULJLQ
The instruction for change of origin for each axis is the following:
axisO[=]expr

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
where axis is the axis name of which you wish to change the origin; use of the equals sign is
necessary only if the expression starts with a parameter. For example:
WO300 YO=LPY/2 assigns a new origin to W (300) and to Y (LPY/2).
If mode G58 is active, origin change is internal and is known only to the interpreter, which
considers the new origin as reference for later values. If mode G59 is active, origin change is
external.
$ 0RYHPHQWRID[HV
By indicating the general name of an axis with axis we can see which instructions are necessary
for their operation.
$VVLJQPHQWRIDQDEVROXWHYDOXH
The following position of an axis is assigned through the instruction:
axis [=]expr
where expr indicates the axis position according to the origin valid at that moment. Such an origin
is the internal one if mode G54 is active and the expression does not include the parameter PRK,,
otherwise it is the machine origin if mode G53 is active or the expression includes the parameter
PRK.. Use of the equals sign is compulsory if the name of the axis ends with a number or if the
expression starts with a parameter.
For example the instructions: X100 Z=LPZ-50 cause the movement of X by displacement 100,
and the movement of Z at displacement LPZ-50.
$VVLJQPHQWRIDQLQFUHPHQWDOYDOXH
It is also possible to assign the next axis position with regard to its last programmed position rather
than at the origin, by using the following instruction:
axisI[=]expr
where the use of the equals sign is compulsory if the expression starts with a parameter.
Thus, for example: XI1000 ZI-10 increases the last programmed position of 1000 for X and -10
for Z.
$VVLJQPHQWRIRSHUDWLQJVSHHG
The operating speed for independent movements (mode G0) is selected, for each axis, by means of the
following instruction:
Faxis[=]expr

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
where: expr invariably refers to a speed value expressed in metres/minute both for programming in
millimetres and in inches. The use of the equals sign is compulsory if the axis name ends with a
number or if the expression starts with a parameter.
For example: FX2.00 FZ0.5 assign the speeds 2 m/min to X and 0.5 m/min. to Z.
The operating speed for the movements of the interpolation axes on a trajectory (modes G1, G2,
G3, G4, G5, G6, G7, G8, G9, G10, G11), can be selected with the following instruction:
F[=]expr
Also in this case, the speed is always expressed in m/min. The use of the equals sign is
compulsory if the expression starts with the name of a parameter.
$VVLJQPHQWRIDFFHOHUDWLRQ
With special software versions, accelerations to be used in speed changes may be assigned. The
instructions for the above, where allowed, have the following syntaxes:
n E[=]expr for interpolated movements
n Eaxis[=]expr for independent movements
where expr indicates the acceleration percentage to be used compared to that in the machine
data.
$ 5HDGLQJRIDVVLJQHGSRVLWLRQVDQGRULJLQV
The value of a position or of an internal origin assigned to an axis in the course of a program may
be inserted in an expression. This is done by using the same name as the assignment instruction.
For example, X=100 assigns position 100 to the axis indicated by X, and ABC=X assigns the
position value of X to parameter ABC. Likewise for the origins.
It should be kept in mind that the axis position value read refers to the value of the current internal
origin for that axis. This means that if an axis position is read after its origin has been changed, you
get a value differing from that assigned before the origin change.
In any case, the position read has nothing to do with the instantaneous real position of the axis
during execution of the program.
The position read of an axis during a sequence of steps using Assisted Geometric Programming
instructions (described below) may give a non correct value, while at the end of the sequence the
requested value may be obtained.
$ 3RVLWLRQLQJ
Positioning is a movement by the machine axes from one given point to the next. The movements
of the machine axes are independent from one another, i.e. each axis is directed to the assigned
displacement at its own speed, independently from the displacement and speed of the other axes.
Positioning is performed when the mode is G0.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
The displacements indicated for an axis undergo a translation of origin of the same axis.
Nevertheless, change of origin of an axis does not in itself cause movement unless an instruction
for position assignment is specifically expressed for that axis.
If the rotation angle of the set of three axes is different from zero, the displacements of the two
axes which constitute the main plane undergo an appropriate transformation of the co-ordinates.
In such a case, assigning a position to one of these axes is enough to make the interpreter
calculate again the real positions of both the plane axes. Let us consider the following program:
N10 G0 XO100 YO100 X0 Y0

N20 X50
N30 RT90 X50
In the line 10 the mode G0 is set for positioning, the internal origin for the co-ordinates x=100
y=100 and the co-ordinate point x=0 y=0 is indicated. Dependent on the piece one would then
have the co-ordinates 100,100. In the line 20, x=50 is set; dependant on the piece one would have
the co-ordinates 150,100 and the movement of only one axis. In the line 30, the plane xy is rotated
by 90 degrees clockwise anticlockwise around the internal origin (100,100), and the position x=50
is determined; this time one would have the co-ordinates 100,150 and movement of both the axes
of the plane.
$GYDQFHGHFODUDWLRQRI$[HVSRVLWLRQHG
The positioning step is normally declared "executed" (and a signal sent to the PLC) only when, for
each commanded axis, the distance from its point of arrival is less than that declared in the
"Advance end of positioning" machine data. In special applications, it may be useful to declare
"step executed" in advance. This is done with instruction:
Iaxis [=]expr
where expr indicates the distance in millimetres from the point of arrival of axis axis, within which
the axis is considered already arrived.
0RGDOLQVWUXFWLRQV*H[SUIRUSRVLWLRQLQJV
Some modal instructions (Gexpr) modify the execution of positionings. These are:
Instructions G60 and G61
By means of positioning programming in G60 mode, positioning "cycles" (regarding one

or more axes) may be created, to be executed in an asynchronous manner compared to
the execution of the program.
By means of instruction G61, the program can synchronise itself with the various cycles
programmed in G60 mode. In correspondence with a G61 instruction, program execution
is blocked until previous positionings activated with G60 mode have been finished. In a
step containing instruction G60, the following may be programmed:
- instructions regarding axis positioning (speed, acceleration, advance, delay),

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
- T instructions, which are managed ONLY with respect to axis correctors, but not with
respect to exchange signals with the PLC.
Other types of instructions involving signals with the PLC (M, KA, S, ...) cannot
appear in a step in which a G60 instruction is inserted.
Example 1
In the following example, two asynchronous positionings are programmed for the X and
Y axes (steps N20 and N30); the program does not wait for completion of the
positionings programmed on lines N20 and N30, but immediately commands positioning
of the Z axis (step N40).
Instruction G61 is programmed at step N60, such programming blocks continuation of
the program until the positionings in step N30 are completed.
N10 X500 Y500 Z100

N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N40 Z300
N50 Z800
N60 Z1000 G61
N70 X200 Y200 Z200
Example 2
The following program is equivalent to the program in Example 1, since the programming
of instruction G61 may take place in a step that does not contain positioning instructions.
N10 X100 Y100 Z100

N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N40 Z300
N50 Z800
N60 Z1000
N60 G61
N70 X200 Y200 Z200
Resetting of "normal" positioning mode
"Normal" positioning mode means positioning not in G60 mode. An axis commanded in
G60 mode can be programmed in "normal" mode only after a G61 instruction.
Example 3:
incorrect programming.
N10 X100 Y100 Z100

N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N40 Z300
N50 Z800
N60 X100 Z1000 ;;INCORRECT STEP

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
Example 4:
correct programming.
N10 X100 Y100 Z100

N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N40 Z300
N50 Z800
N55 G61
N60 X100 Z1000
Programming of multiple cycles in G60 mode
Multiple cycles may be programmed in G60 mode. These cycles are asynchronous with
respect to execution of the program as well as with respect to each other.
Example 5:
positioning steps that are asynchronous with respect to the program and synchronous
with respect to each other.
The following steps have been programmed in example 4:
N20 X100 Y100 G60

N30 X400 Y400 G60
such steps constitute a single asynchronous cycle with respect to the program and are
executed in sequence. Step N30 is executed only after both N20 positionings have been
completed.
If the positionings of X and Y are to be made asynchronous to each other, program 2
cycles in G60 mode as follows:
N20 X100 G60

N30 X400 G60 ;FIRST CYCLE
;
N31 Y100 G60
N32 Y400 G60;SECOND CYCLE
The 2 programmed cycles will be asynchronous with respect to the program and to each
other. In particular, since each cycle concerns only one axis, the steps are also
connected to one another (they have no end of cycle).
Further information
Let’s start with a situation in which there is no type of G60 cycle in execution.
The first program step containing instruction G60 identifies a set of axes constituting a
G60 cycle. Later steps in G60 mode in which only axes in that set appear will still be part
of that cycle (i.e., will be in synch).
When a step containing instruction G60 is programmed in which only axes not in the
previous set are contained, a second cycle is identified.
Later steps containing instruction G60 in which only axes in the second set appear will be
considered part of the second cycle (i.e., will be in synch).
A step programmed in G60 mode is considered incorrect if there appear axes pertaining
to the last defined set and at least one axis not in the set.
A single cycle programmed in G60 mode may not contain more than 15 steps.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
Example 7
correct programming.
N10 X100 Y100 Z100 U100 V100 W100

;
N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60 ;FIRST SET
;
N20 Z100 U100 G60
N30 Z400 U400 G60
N20 Z100 U100 G60 ;SECOND SET
N20 V100 W100 G60

N30 V400 W400 G60
N20 V100 W100 G60
N20 V100 W100 G60
N30 V400 W400 G60
N20 V100 W100 G60 ;THIRD SET
N40 A1=100 A2=100 A3=100

N40 A1=200 A2=200 A3=200
N40 A1=100 A2=100 A3=100
N55 G61 ;WAIT FOR ALL 3 CYCLES
;
N10 X100 Y100 Z100 U100 V100 W100
N60 X100 Z1000
;
;ETC. ETC.
Example 8
N10 X100 Y100 Z100 U100 V100 W100

;
N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
;
N20 X100 Z100 U100 G60 ;THIS STEP CONTAINS X AXIS
;(PERTAINING TO FIRST SET) AND Z,U
;WHICH DO NOT PERTAIN TO IT
Example 9

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
N10 X100 Y100 Z100 U100 V100 W100

;
N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N20 X100 Y100 G60
;
N20 Z100 U100 G60
N30 Z400 U400 G60
;
N41 X500 Y500 G60
N42 X600 Y600 G60
N43 X700 Y700 G60 ;THIS CYCLE HAS AXES THAT PERTAIN
;TO A PREVIOUS CYCLE
correct programming:
N10 X100 Y100 Z100 U100 V100 W100

;
N20 X100 Y100 G60
N30 X400 Y400 G60
N20 X100 Y100 G60
;
N41 X500 Y500 G60
N42 X600 Y600 G60
N43 X700 Y700 G60
;
N20 Z100 U100 G60
N30 Z400 U400 G60
It is also incorrect to define a G60 type cycle with axes managed by different axes cards,
since the various steps can never be synchronised. In this case, divide the cycle into
more than one cycle, each of which is managed by the same card.
Istruction G66
The instruction G66 makes simultaneous start on various independent cycles possible.
Example:
N10 X0 Y0
N20 X100 Y100 [G66]
N30 X500 Y400 [G66]
N40 X600 Y700 [G66]
N50 X700
In a sequence of this kind, there will be 2 cycles (on X and Y), each having 3
positionings. The presence of G66 is essential in the opening step but superfluous in the
others. The cycle will stop at the first step that does not contain all of the axes present in
the opening step (in this case, there will be an end of cycle at the end of N40) (or due to
other end of cycle conditions). If G66 were not programmed in step N20, there would be

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
an end of cycle at the end of every step. In the step containing G66, and axis is
commanded even if a confirmed value is programmed (which normally would not occur).
$ ,QWHUSRODWLRQ
With interpolation in the movement to the next programmed point, in addition to the approaching of
its co-ordinates, the trajectory followed is important, and depending on the case considered it can
be: a line segment, a circular or an elliptical arc, or an arc of a cylindrical helix.
The machine axes movements are linked up together and they cause the point to move along the
trajectory at the fixed interpolation speed.
As regards the interpolations, see positionings, translations and co-ordinate rotations of the
programmed points.
/LQHDULQWHUSRODWLRQ
With linear interpolation, the trajectory is a line segment linking up the starting point to the final
point. To be able to perform the movements of the linear interpolation, mode G1 must be active.
The system can interpolate simultaneously on 6 axes; i.e., it can move a point along a line
segment having 6 dimension space.
&LUFXODULQWHUSRODWLRQ
With circular interpolation, the trajectory is an arc of a circumference, linking up the starting point to
the final point. This interpolation can only be performed on planes which are parallel to the main
plane.
There are 5 modal instructions (G2, G3, G4, G5, G6) to be used to perform the movements in
circular interpolation, according to the data supplied to complete the definition of the arc.
Assuming that the starting point and final point are known, the following possibilities are available:
Arc with given centre (G2 or 3)

It can be performed using G2 when clockwise anticlockwise , or using G3 when
anticlockwise clockwise .
The centre co-ordinates are determined with instructions Iand J, respectively, for axes x
and y of the main plane.
The NC checks that the distance between the initial point and the centre is equal to the
distance between the final point and the centre, within the tolerance assigned by the
machine data interpolation radius tolerance. The recommended value is 0.1 mm. If the
check results are not correct, the NC performs a correction on the co-ordinates of the
end point so that the difference between the two calculated distances is within the
tolerance range. Beyond this value, the system indicates a fatal error and it stops. If the
final point coincides with the starting point, a 360 degree arc is then performed.
Known radius arc (G4 or G5)

It is performed with mode G4 if the direction is clockwise anticlockwise , or with mode G5
if the direction is anticlockwise clockwise .

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
The value of the radius is specified with instruction R and the sign of the latter is
necessary to determine which of the two possible arcs must be used. If the radius is
positive, one follows the arc having the centre to the right left of the oriented line going
from the starting point to the final point, except if the arc is then followed by the centre on
the left right of the same line. The system checks that the distance between the initial
and final point is not greater than double the radius set, within the tolerance specified by
the machine data interpolation radius tolerance. Beyond this value the system signals a
fatal error and stops. If the final point coincides with the starting one, no movement will
be performed.
Arc tangent with previous step (G6)

It can be performed with mode G6. The system automatically generates an arc of
circumference (or a line segment), which is continuously tangential with previous step,
up to the programmed point. The line segment is performed in case the final point is
exactly on the tangent coming out from previous step.
Definition of centre co-ordinates
The centre co-ordinates are defined with the following:
I[=]exprfor the first axis of the fundamental set of three axes
J[=]expr for the second axis of the fundamental set of three axes
K[=]expr for the third axis of the fundamental set of three axes
where: expr indicates the value (expressed with the unit of measurement selected) of the
co-ordinate with regard to the origin valid at that moment. The origin is internal if mode
G54, is active, or is the machine origin if mode G53 is active. The use of the equals sign
is compulsory if the expression starts with a parameter.
For example, the instructions:I100 J=LPZ-5 set the co-ordinates of the centre to
(100,LPZ-50).
The co-ordinates of the centre undergo the transformations due to the translation and
rotation of the set of three axes, exactly as the displacements of the axes forming the
main plane.
Definition of radius length
The radius is defined by means of instruction:
R[=]expr
where: mode expr indicates the length of the radius in millimetres or inches according to
the unit of measurement selected, while the sign is necessary for the discriminator for
the solution of the arc, as described above. The use of the equals sign is necessary
when the expression starts with a parameter.
If any of the values requested has not been defined, the system will use the last value
determined. In order to generate a movement, at least one co-ordinate of the arrival point
must be set.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
Circular interpolation in space, with given center co-ordinates
Execute with mode G9 if the arc is less than 180 degrees, or with mode G10 if it is greater
than 180 degrees. The center co-ordinates are defined by means of the instructions I,
J, K for the axes x, y, z, of the fundamental set of three axes, respectively. The NC
checks that the distance between the initial point and the center is equal to the distance
between the end point and the center within the assigned tolerance (the default tolerance
is 0.1 mm). Beyond that value the system signals a fatal error and stops. If the initial
point, the center and the end point are aligned (180 degree arc), it signals a fatal error.
Circular interpolation in space, with given intermediate point
Execute with mode G11. The co-ordinates of the intermediate point are defined by
instructions I, J, K for the x, y, z, axes of the fundamental set of three axes,
respectively. The initial, intermediate, and end point must be distinct and non aligned. If
the contrary is true, the system signals a fatal error.
(OOLSWLFDOLQWHUSRODWLRQ
With elliptical interpolation, the trajectory is an elliptical arc; the trajectory occurs on a plane
parallel to the main plane. There are two modal instructions (G7, G8) to perform the movements in
elliptical interpolation, with regard to clockwise anticlockwise (G7) or anticlockwise clockwise (G8)
directions.
For the definition of an elliptical arc to the final point, the co-ordinates of the centre must also be
specified, as well as for the circumference, and the length of the semi-axes, which is set with the
instructions:
n RI[=]expr for the semi-axis parallel to x (1st axis)
n RJ[=]expr for the semi-axis parallel to y (1st axis)
where the module expr indicates the length of the semi-axis in millimetres or inches depending on
the unit of measure selected.
The use of the equals sign is compulsory if the expression starts with a parameter.
If one of the values has not been defined, the system uses the last value set.
The system checks that the starting points and final points pertain to the ellipse foci and semi-axes
indicated, with a tolerance of 0.1 mm. Should this value be exceeded, the system indicates a fatal
error and stops.
+HOLFRLGDOLQWHUSRODWLRQ
In helicoidal interpolation, the trajectory is a helical arc with the longitudinal axis perpendicular to
the main plane, linking up the starting point to the final point.
The projection of the movement on the main plane can be a circular or elliptical arc. The definition
of an helicoidal interpolation step is very similar to that of a step in circular or elliptical interpolation,
with the only difference that a change on one or more axes (max. 4) is specified. These axes
interpolate in a linear manner between one another and an angular quantity used by the system
when building the arc.
The same checks are performed by the system in the case of circular or elliptical interpolation, and

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
are performed as if no change occurred on the axes of the helix.

With G2 or G3 it is possible to perform a 360 degree arc, so that a complete helix step can be
performed. If one wishes to perform more steps, it is enough to repeat the same movement n
times, for example:
N10 X100 Y0 Z0 G0 ;POSITIONING

N20 X100 I0 J0 ZI20 G3 RP10 ;10 COMPLETE REVS. OF A 20MM STEP
With helicoidal circular interpolation the speed set refers to the actual trajectory.
$ %HYHODQGFRQWLJXRXVVHJPHQWV
%HYHO
It is possible to insert a step which bevels the angle formed between two contiguous segments
lying in a plane parallel to the main plane and not tangential to one another. This step is calculated
automatically by the system via instruction:
BM[=]expr
where: expr indicates the length of the part, in millimetres or inches according to the unit selected,
by which each of the two segments will be shortened, starting from their point of contact. The use
of the equals symbol is mandatory if the expression starts with a parameter.
The system naturally checks that the length of each of the two segments in question are longer
than that of the bevel itself. Should this not be the case then a fatal error is registered and program
execution is aborted.
The condition that the segments lie in a plane parallel to the main plane is not necessary for
calculation of the bevel, although the latter will only be carried out correctly in this case. In
contrast, the system calculates the bevel with respect to the projections of the two segments onto
the plane parallel to the main plane, the former containing their point of contact and the bevel itself.
This also modifies the remaining sections of the segments with respect to the original trajectory.
The following program example specifies the abovesaid; the figure below illustrates the movement
of the programmed axes.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
G0 X=500 Y=100 Z=0

G1 Y=600 Z=300 BM=100
G1 X=100 Z=500
segment AB (1) chamfer

X’Y’ parallel plane to principal planeXY
Continuous line: original segments
Dashed line: trajectory followed after chamfer calculation
Dotted line: Projection segments on principal axis
&RQWLJXRXVHOHPHQWV
It is possible to impose that the NC automatically, by means of a circular step, links any two
contiguous elements, lying in the plane or in space. If the two elements lie in a plane parallel to the
principal plane, the following instruction must be used:
BR[=]expr
where expr indicates the length of the link radius in millimetres or inches depending on the unit of
measure selected. The use of the equals sign is mandatory if the expression starts with a
parameter. The system of course checks that the starting and ending points of the connecting arc
are contained within the elements being connected. Should this not be the case, (probably
because the radius of the arc is too large) then an error is flagged and program execution is
aborted. The calculation of the link is executed correctly only if the two elements lie in a plane
parallel to the principal plane. If this plane is not parallel to the principal plane, the link is calculated
with respect to the projections of the two elements in the principal plane.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
$ 3URJUDPPLQJRIVSDWLDOZRUNGLUHFWLRQV
$ 6SDWLDORULHQWDWLRQRIVSLQGOHV
Each spindle may take on any spatial direction determined by its spatial offset (angle on horizontal
plane and angle on vertical plane) defined in the Correctors tables in the Technical Data
application program. Tool work point is calculated based on spindle offsets and length of tool fit.
$ 6SDWLDORULHQWDWLRQRIDJJUHJDWHV
An aggregate is an object composed of one or more subspindles. The geometry for the aggregate
is defined in the Aggregates Table included with the Tooling Data in the technical Data application
program. These definition data refer to a clockwise Cartesian tern having an origin coinciding with
the power takeoff of the aggregate itself.
Each subspindle belonging to an aggregate may take on any spatial direction determined by its
spatial offset (angle on horizontal plane and angle on vertical plane) defined in the Subspindle
tables in the Technical Data application program.
It is also possible to program rotations to add to default rotations in the same way described for the
spindles. These rotations relate to the centre of rotation of the aggregate and they are
programmed by the instructions:
n AR[=]expr
n AZ[=]expr
where expr is an expression whose result must be a number whose unit of measurement is 60ths
of a degree.
Example of programming
N20 TP2:2 AR=90 AZ=45
The rotation of the aggregate fit on pantograph spindle 2 is programmed in step N20;
final orientation is given by the algebraic sum of the programmed angles of rotation and
of the angular offsets of subspindle 2.
Every time you program an instruction type TP it is good practice to program instructions
AR and AZ as well.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$ $*3$VVLVWHG*HRPHWULF3URJUDPPLQJ
The Assisted Geometric Programming (A.G.P.) package is a facility which is active only on the
main plane and which is used to enter steps for which the end point co-ordinates are not known,
but for which one knows the relation to the previous step (e.g. tangent or intersection), the value of
an angle, of a length or, more generally, of data directly derivable from the design, but which are
not directly usable in the normal method of programming.
The totality of blocks which are both necessary and sufficient to permit the system to calculate all
the co-ordinates of a geometric element (point of arrival and/or centre of a circle) constitutes a
geometric sequence.
A geometric sequence has as its origin the starting point of its first element. Such a point can either
be programmed in the preceding step or calculated by the system. In fact, the first block in a
geometric sequence can be the last of the previous sequence.
The system is capable of resolving sequences of up to three such incompletely defined steps.
Nevertheless it is not capable of resolving all possible combinations of data which can make up a
geometrically determined sequence; i.e., it is not able to "invent" a solution on demand (a problem
which, in general, is not easy to solve). The system is able to recognise the solution of only a
certain number of different sequences that have been stored, and can use only these. Their
number should nevertheless be sufficient to cover the majority, if not all, of those cases which are
likely to occur in practice.
The list of recognised sequences is given at the end of this chapter.
$ ,QVWUXFWLRQVIRU*HRPHWULF3URJUDPPLQJ
When defining steps with Assisted Geometric Programming, the following instructions are added:
n BS[+|-] block intersects with its successor
n BT[+|-] block is tangential to its successor
where: [+|-] indicates either "+" or "-", used to discriminate between the two possible solutions,
where the programmed sequence permits this. Whenever the discriminator is omitted, it is treated
as a "+".
Other instructions used are:
BA[=]expr
where expr is a value in sixtieths of a degree (minutes) which indicates the angle that an oriented
straight line segment passing from start to end point makes with the X-axis, or the angle traversed
by a circumferential arc. and finally:
BL[=]expr
where expr is a value in mm or inches, according to the unit used, which indicates the linear length
of a segment or a circumferential arc. The use of the equals sign is mandatory if the expression
starts with a parameter.
The value of the expressions given in the preceding instructions can also be negative. In the case
of the instruction BA applied to a segment, the meaning is obvious, although this cannot be said for
an arc or for the instruction BL. The effect produced in such situations will be described later with
the aid of some examples.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
For an incompletely defined step to be part of a sequence in Assisted Geometric Programming, at

least one of these four instructions must be present. If not, the information referring to the two axes
in the main plane may ignored and/or poorly interpreted.
The instruction indicating that a step is tangential to its successor (BT) can be omitted where the
step also contains a BA instruction. The instruction that a step intersects with its successor (BS)
can never be omitted.
Finally, certain instructions cannot be performed within a sequence using P.G.A., for example: a
displacement of the origin of the main plane or a change of the set of three axes. Use of the above
instructions blocks execution of the program.
$ 8VHRIGLVFULPLQDWRU
Certain sequences can have more than one solution, as in the case of the intersection of a straight
line with a circle or a circle with a circle, in which cases there can be two solutions, or in the
calculation of elements tangential to each other, in which there can also be more than two
solutions. In this cases, it is necessary to point out that the number of solutions is therefore limited
to a maximum of two, due to the fact that the system realises only the two "continuous" tangents,
i.e. without withdrawal.
Where two solutions are possible, a discriminator is used to eliminate uncertainty. Programming of
the discriminator is included in instructions BT and BS, via the option "+" or "-". This sign option
serves to specify the position of a characteristic point (intersection, tangent, centre of arc) of both
solutions with respect to a particularly oriented straight line (which we indicate by D). The oriented
straight line D is:
1. the straight line belonging to a segment defined via instruction BA, if there is an element so
defined among the two elements in question. If there are two such defined elements, the first
of the two is used; otherwise it is:
2. the straight line which joins a known point in the first element (a centre of arc if known,
otherwise a start point, in order of priority), with the first of the points known between the
second and the final element (a possible centre of arc always having precedence over an end
point).
The characteristic point subject to discrimination is:
n the point of tangency/intersection in the case where the straight line (D) is determined as in
case 1), otherwise it is:
n the centre of arc if this is not known, or otherwise,
n the point of tangency/intersection.
Having determined oriented straight line (D) and the characteristic point, there can be two cases:
1. The two possible solution points are to be found on oriented straight line (D). In this case, "+"
defines the point close to "+∞" on the oriented straight line, while "-" defines the point closest
to "-∞".

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
2. The two possible solution points are on two parts of oriented straight line (D). In this case "+"
defines the point on the left right of the oriented straight line, while "-" defines that on the right
left .
In addition, there is special case of discrimination which uses the sign of the expression of BL
when calculating a segment for which ones knows, in addition to the starting point, only one of the
end point co-ordinates. In this case, a positive value of the expression indicates the larger value for
the two possible co-ordinates, viceversa for a negative value.
The tables of examples, presented in paragraph A.5.4 “Examples of possible A.G.P.”, associated
with the list of possible cases, will help to make it clearer how these rules are applied by the
system.
$ /LVWRIFDVHVUHVROYHGE\$*3
When one activates Assisted Geometric Programming, instructions G4 and G5 are automatically
converted into G2 and G3, respectively, and are seen as such by the geometric interpreter. For this
reason, instruction G4(5) never appears in the following table, a fact which is permitted.
Instructions X and Y indicate the assignments to the two axes of the main plane.
The blocks marked with (*) give the solution for those blocks which precede the asterisk but
remain incomplete. For this reason, they become the first block of the following program
description. Table 2.7 organises all of the cases provided by geometric programming.
FIRST STRAIGHT BLOCK

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
G1 BA... X...
G1 BA... Y...
G1 BA... BL...
G1 BL[+|-]... X...
G1 BL[+|-]... Y...
G1 BA... BS G1 BA... X... Y...
G1 BA... [BT] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G1 BA... BS[+|-] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT[+|-] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
FIRST STRAIGHT BLOCK

G1 BA... [BT] G2(3) I... J... BT (*)
G2(3) I... J... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... BA...
G2(3) I... J... BL...
G1 BA... [BT[+|-]] G2(3) R... X... Y...
G1 BA... [BT] G2(3) R... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G1 BA... [BT[+|-]] G2(3) R... BT G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G1 BT... G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT[+|-] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
FIRST CIRCULAR BLOCK

G2(3) BL... I... J...
G2(3) BA... I... J...
G2(3) BT I... J... G1 BA... [BT] (*)

G1 BA... BS (*)
G1 BA... BL...
G1 BA... X...
G1 BA... Y...
G1 X... Y...
G1 BT G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
FIRST CIRCULAR BLOCK

G2(3) BT[+|-] I... J... G2(3) I... J... BT (*)
G2(3) I... J... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... BA...
G2(3) I... J... BL...
G2(3) R... X... Y...
G2(3) R... BT G1 BA... X... Y...

G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) BS[+|-] I... J... G1 BA... X... Y...
G1 BA... [BT] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT[+|-] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) BT[+|-] R... G1 BA... X... Y...
G1 BA... [BT] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G2(3) I... J... BT[+|-] G2(3) I... J... R... BT (*)

G2(3) I... J... R... BS (*)
G2(3) I... J... R... BA...
G2(3) I... J... R... BL...
G2(3) I... J... X... Y...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
$ ([DPSOHVRISRVVLEOH$*3
G1 BA... BS G1 BA... X... Y...
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
> @ G2 I...J...R...BA
G1 BA... BS G1 BA... BT
G2 I...J...R...BL
 G2 I...J...X...Y
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G1 BA... BS-
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
+ 
G1 BA... BS> @ G2 I...J...R...BA
G2 I...J...R...BL
 G2 I...J...X...Y
G1 BA... BS- G3 I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G1 BA... BS>+@ G3 I... J... BT G1 BA...
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G1 BA... BS- G3 I... J... BT>+@ G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G1 BA... BS- G3 I... J... BT- G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G1 BA...
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
G1 BA... >BT@ G3 R... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G1 BA... BT- G3 R... X... Y...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
G1 BA...
>BT>+@@ G3 R... X... Y...
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G1 BA... BT- G2 R... BT G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G1 BA... [BT[+]] G2 R... BT
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G1 BT...
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
G1 BT... G3 I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G1 BT... G2 I... J... BT
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G1 BT... G3 I... J... BT- G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
 G1G1 BA...[BT](*)
BA...BS(*)
G2 BT I... J...
 G1 BA...X
G1 BA...BL
 G1 BA...Y

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
G2 BT I... J... G1 X... Y...
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT I... J... G1 BT
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT I... J... G1 BT
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
 G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
G3 I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT I... J...
 G3 I...J...R...BA
G3 I...J...R...BL


(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT- I... J...
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
G2 BT>
+@ I... J... G3 R... X... Y...
G2 BT>+@I... J... G3 R... BT G1 BA...

X... Y...
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 BT>+@ I... J... G3 R... G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
BT

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT- I... J... G2 R... BT
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
G2 BS>
+@ I... J... G1 BA... X... Y...
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 BS- I... J... G1 BA... >BT@ G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BS>+@I...
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
J...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
G2 BS- I... J... G3 I... J... BT G1 BA... X... Y...
G2 BS>@ I... J...

 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
 G2 I...J...R...BL
............. G3 I... J... BT G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
G2 BS- I... J...

 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
+
........... G3 I... J... BT> @ G3 I...J...R...BA
G3 I...J...R...BL
 G3 I...J...X...Y
G2 BT>+@ R... G1 BA... X... Y...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
G2 BT- R... G1 BA... X... Y...
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT>+@ R... G1 BA...  G3 I...J...R...BA
G3 I...J...R...BL
>BT@
 G3 I...J...X...Y
 G3G3 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT- R...
 G3 I...J...R...BL
G3 I...J...R...BA
 G3 I...J...X...Y
G2 BT- R... G3 I... J... R... BT G1 BA... X... Y...

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
G2 BT>
+@ R... G3 I... J... R... BT G1 BA...
X... Y...
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
G2 BT- R... G3 I... J... BT
 G2 I...J...R...BL
G2 I...J...R...BA
 G2 I...J...X...Y
 G2G2 I...J...R...BT(*)
I...J...R...BS(*)
+
G2 BT- R... G3 I... J... BT> @ G2 I...J...R...BA
G2 I...J...R...BL
 G2 I...J...X...Y

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$ ([DPSOHSURJUDP
N10 PAX=55+6 PAY=10 X=PAX Y=PAY

N20 G2 BT I55 J=PAY
N30 G1 BT
N40 G3 I30+7 J-3 R7 BT
N50 G1 BA-90 BS+
N60 G2 I0 J0 R50 BT
N70 G2 RR=50-5 AN1=-90-30 I=RR*_CAN1 J=RR*_SAN1 BA180
N80 G3 I0 J0 BS-
N90 G1 BA90-11+15
N100 G2 R15 I0 J0 BT
N110 G1 BA90-11 Y40 BR10
N120 G1 BA0 BS+
N130 G2 I4 J19.2 R32 BS-
N140 G1 BA180
N150 G3 I25 J=PAY+6+5 R5 BT
N160 G1 BT
N170 G2 I55 J=PAY X=PAX Y=PAY

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
$ 7RRO5DGLXV&RUUHFWLRQ&58
A tool diameter is associated with each of the tools present in the machine, which is accounted for
when the control works with tool radius correction set. The system compensates automatically for
tool diameter, permitting the user to create a work program which is independent of the diameter of
the tools employed.
The tool radius correction is performed only on planes parallel to the main plane. With
simultaneous interpolations of more than two axes, the correction will only be made on the
projection of the trajectory on the main plane.
$ ,QVWUXFWLRQVIRU&RUUHFWLRQRI7RRO5DGLXV
In addition to modal instructions G1, ..., G8, needed for interpolation, Correction Tool Radius
(C.R.U.) uses the following modal instructions:
G40* Cancellation of C.R.U. Reset by: G41, G42.
G41 C.R.U. to left right of profile. Reset by: G40, G42.
G42 C.R.U. to right left of profile. Reset by: G40, G41.
G68 Entry of connecting arc step in C.R.U. between non-tangent convex steps. Reset by G69.
G69* Intersection of trajectories corrected in C.R.U. (if possible). Reset by G68.
The asterisk (*) indicates functions that are active at the start of the program.
A work program with C.R.U. must start with a step of linear or circular engagement with the profile,
in which instructions G41 or G42 are used and which terminate with a step of disengagement from
the profile, this also being linear or circular, in which instruction G40 is used.
The tool used for work must be activated prior to the setting of C.R.U. and deactivated on or after
resetting of C.R.U.
A program employing instructions G41, G42, can be used without C.R.U., simply by setting the
tool radius to the value of 0.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$ /LQHDUHQJDJHPHQWDQGGLVHQJDJHPHQW
The figure shows an example
Tool radius: 100

Continuous line: trajectory incorrect
Dashed line: trajectory correct
N10 G0 X200 Y400 T5

N20 G1 X500 Y700 G42 F2 ; LINEAR ENGAGEMENT STEP
N30 X900
N40 X1000 Y200 G40 T0 ; LINEAR DISENGAGEMENT STEP
Engagements and disengagements are performed, which are non-tangential with respect to the
profile. This implies a stop after the initial engagement step and before the final disengagement
step.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
$ &LUFXODUHQJDJHPHQWDQGGLVHQJDJHPHQW
The figure shows an example
Tool radius: 100

Continuous line: trajectory incorrect
Dashed line: trajectory correct
N10 G0 X200 Y400 T5

N20 G4 X500 Y700 R660 G42 F2 ; CIRCULAR ENGAGEMENT STEP
N30 G1 X900
N40 G4 X1000 Y200 R660 G40 T0 ; CIRCULAR DISENGAGEMENT STEP
The corrected trajectory in this case engages and disengages tangentially to the workpiece profile
and therefore does not cause stops.
It is not important how steps N20 and N40 are defined, the essential aspect is that they are
performed without tool correction with circular interpolation.
Thus the modification of the G4 in G5, or that of the radius from 660 to -500 for example, would
have caused only a change in the non-corrected trajectory, while the tool correction would have
remained unchanged.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$ ,PPHGLDWHFKDQJHLQFRUUHFWLRQGLUHFWLRQ
The insertion of an instruction G41 while an instruction G42 is enabled, or vice versa, the insertion
of an instruction G42 while an instruction G41 is enabled, causes the immediate change in the
correction direction. If the instructions G42, G41 operate on a program step in which the G1
instruction is set, the change in correction direction is linear. In other situations it is activated by
means of two circumference arcs. These arcs are tangent between them: one at the inlet and one
at the outlet of the profile. If the change in correction direction is not executed linearly, it is
advisable to test it out very carefully.
$ &RUUHFWLRQIRUGLIIHUHQWW\SHVRILQWHUVHFWLRQV
The correction of tool radius is performed in different ways, depending on the form of the
programmed trajectory. Following are the various cases of correction foreseen. The series of
cases is organised based on the type of intersection of the geometric entities used to program the
trajectory of the angle they form. In the following list, instructions given by default are indicated
with a (*).
/LQHOLQHLQWHUVHFWLRQ
Concave Angle
The compensation is calculated on the bisector of the angle between the lines AB and BC as
shown in figure.
Convex angle < 120 degrees and G69 *
If the angle is less than or equal to and G69, compensation is performed on the bisector
of the two lines AB and BC as shown in figure.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
Convex angle < 120 degrees and G68
If the angle is less than or equal to and G68, the system automatically generates a
connecting arc C1 bounded by the two normals N1 and N2 emerging from the point of
intersection B as shown in figure. (see also additional connecting arc).
Convex angle > 120 degrees
If the angle between the two lines is greater than the system automatically generates a
connecting arc C1, bounded by the two normals N1 and N2 emerging from the point of
intersection B. The corrected trajectory in G41 is the segment of the straight line parallel
to AB, the circular arc C1 and the segment of the straight line parallel to BC, as shown in
figure. (see also additional connecting arc).
,QWHUVHFWLRQOLQHFLUFXPIHUHQFH
If the angle between the tangent at the circumference at the point of intersection with the
straight line and the straight line itself is less than and G68, compensation is performed
at the intersection D of the two compensated trajectories as shown in figure.
straight line and the straight line itself is less than and G68, the system automatically

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
generates a connection arc C1, bounded by the two normals N1 and N2 emerging from
the point of intersection B as shown in figure.

If the angle between the tangent to the circumference at the point of intersection with the straight
line and the straight line itself is greater than , the system automatically generates a connecting arc
bounded by the two normals emerging in the point B.
Angle = 180 degrees
straight line and the straight line itself is equal to 180 degrees, the compensation is
performed as shown in the figure (circumference tangential with the point of return).
Concave angle
Whatever the value of the angle between the tangent to the circumference at the point of
intersection and the straight line, compensation is performed at the intersection of the
two compensated curves as shown in the figure.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
,QWHUVHFWLRQ&LUFXPIHUHQFH&LUFXPIHUHQFH
The correction is performed by intersecting the two correct trajectories as shown in

figure.
Convex angle > 10 degrees and G68
The system automatically generates a circular connecting arc C1 between the two
normals N1 and N2 emerging from the point of intersection B as shown in figure.
Concave angle
Whatever the value of the angle between the two tangents to the circumference at point
B, the compensation is performed at the intersection of the two compensated curves as
shown in the figures.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
,QWHUVHFWLRQ/LQH(OOLSVH
If the angle between the tangent to the ellipse at the point of intersection with the straight
line and the straight line itself is less than and G69, compensation is performed at the
intersection D of the two compensated trajectories, as shown in figure.
line and the straight line itself is less than and G68, the system automatically generates a
circular connecting arc C1, bounded by the two normals N1 and N2 emerging from the
point of intersection B, as shown in figure.
line and the straight line itself is greater than , the system automatically generates a
circular connecting arc between the two normals N1 and N2 emerging from the point of
intersection B, as shown in figure.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
Angle = 180 degrees
If the angle between the tangent to the ellipse at the link point with the straight line and
the line itself is equal to 180 degrees, the compensation is executed in the same way.
Concave angle
Whatever the value of the angle between the tangent to the ellipse at the point of
intersection with the straight line, compensation is performed at intersection D of the two
compensated trajectories as shown in figures.
,QWHUVHFWLRQZLWK(OOLSVHV
Intersection Ellipse-Circumference
A connection between an ellipse and a circumference or a circumference and an ellipse

is permitted only where the trajectories have the same tangent at the point of intersection
as shown in figure.
Intersection Ellipse-Ellipse
A connection between two ellipses is permitted only where the trajectories have the
same tangent at the point of intersection as shown in figure.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
Additional circular connection
In the insertion phase of a circular connecting step, the centre of the tool will travel along
a trajectory parallel to AB, go through arc C1 and the trajectory parallel to BC without
stopping on normals N1 and N2, as shown in figure.
$ ([DPSOHVRIZRUN
Examples of work (internal and external) on a square profile with two sides connected with
elliptical trajectories and with two circular arcs. The program is set so as never to stop the tool
when it is in contact with the profile, as shown in the following figures.
Examples of external work
N10 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 F5 T1
N20 G1 Y300 G41
N30 G3 X200 Y500 I0 J500
N40 G1 Y1100
N50 G7 X400 Y1500 I400 J1100 RI200 RJ400
N60 G1 X1100
N70 G7 X1300 Y1100 I1100

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
N80 G1 Y500
N90 G2 X1100 Y300 J500
N100 G1 X400
N110 G2 X200 Y500 I400
N120 G3 X0 Y700 I0
N130 G1 X0 Y0 G40 T0
Examples of internal work
N10 G0 X400 Y1100 Z0 F5 T1

N20 G1 Y900 G42
N30 G2 X200 Y1100 I400 J1100
N40 G7 X400 Y1500 I400 J1100 RI200 RJ400
N50 G1 X1100
N60 G7 X1300 Y1100 I1100
N70 G1 Y500
N80 G2 X1100 Y300 J500
N90 G1 X400
N100 G2 X200 Y500 I400
N110 G1 Y1100
N120 G2 X400 Y1300 J1100
N130 G1 Y1100 G40 T0

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
$ 6SHHGFKHFN
The system runs checks on the axis speed and acceleration with the purpose of respecting the
limits set in machine data and, if necessary, modifies the nominal speed set in the program. With
Tool Radius Correction active, an additional mechanism to modify the programmed speed can
intervene. Given that the circular steps undergo a radius variation, the programmed speed is
decreased proportional to the radius decrease for the concave arcs, while the speed is not
modified for the convex arcs, i.e. those for which the radius is increased.
This speed reduction can be deactivated through special functions.
$ 6SLQGOHVDQGWRROV
Let us now look at the instructions pertaining to spindles and tools.
$ &RQILJXUDWLRQRIKHDG
The configuration of the tool head is selectable from those in memory using the instruction:
HC[=]expr
where expr is an expression with a positive integer result. This instruction must be placed at the
start of the program.
$ 6HOHFWLRQRIVSLQGOHV
The selection of the spindles which must work at a certain time is specified with the following
instructions:
n T[=]spindle[:]tool[,spindle,...]
n TH[=]spindle[:tool][,spindle,...]
n TP[=]spindle[:tool[,spindle,...]
where: spindle,spindle,... indicates the series of identification numbers of the spindles to be

activated from that point on, and : tool which may as an option follow only the first spindle
identification number, indicates (in the case of a multi-tool spindle) which of the tools is to be
activated. The use of the equal sign is optional. A maximum number of 128 spindles can be
simultaneously activated.
With the syntax indicated above both spindle and tool represent whole numerical constants.
The spindles can also be selected indirectly by using expressions. There are two possibilities; the
first is:
T[=]expr$

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
where expr$ is an expression with alphanumeric result used as a tool list as if they were declared
directly, i.e., such as "spindle:tool,spindle,...". The other possibility is:
T[=]expr [:expr ]
where expr is an expression with numerical result indicating the number of a single spindle,
followed by an expression indicating tool number if the spindle is multi-tool. The use of the "=" sign
is optional if the expressions do not start with a parameter. Such selection modes function for
instructions TH, TP.
The selection remains active up to the next selection which makes changes, or up to a reset of
selections, which can be obtained with instructions T[=]0, TH[=]0, ecc..., indicating ’0’ as the
only tool ’0’.
$ 5HIHUHQFHVSLQGOH
Where several tools have been selected simultaneously, the specified displacement is respected
by the first of the tools selected, i.e. its corrections are used. Example:
N300 G0 X300 Y200 Z=PRK T5,2,12
serves to position three vertical points, ready for boring, at the co-ordinates 300,200, and such a
point will be effectively reached from the point number 5.
$ 5RWDWLRQVSHHG
The rotation speed of the milling cutter spindles can be assigned by means of the instruction:
S[=]expr
where: expr indicates the rotation speed in rpm. The use of this is obligatory if the expression
starts with a parameter. This instruction can also be used for the spindles type T and TH provided
that the relevant inverter control has been activated. For further information refer to the Service
Manual and, in particular, to the section relative to the description of the Table Inverter
control for T, TH.
$ 3URJUDPMXPSV
Program flow can be modified via jump instructions, of which there are 3 kinds:
n unconditional,
n conditional,
n conditional dependent on PLC

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
n to routing section of another processing centre
$ 8QFRQGLWLRQDOMXPS
The unconditional jump instruction has the following syntax:
JM:expr
This instruction involves continuation of program execution starting from the label indicated by the
value of expr. The ability to insert expressions to define the label to be jumped to permits the
writing of shorter programs if the point of continuation must be chosen from many points on the
basis of one parameter.
$ &RQGLWLRQDOMXPS
The conditional jump instruction has the following syntax:
JM[!](expr ):expr
This instruction involves continuation of program execution starting from the label indicated by the
value of expr, if the expression in round parentheses is true. Otherwise the next step is performed.
If the negation operator (!) is placed before the round parentheses then the jump is performed if
the expression is false.
An expression is taken to be false if its value is zero, otherwise it is true. The relational operators (
<, >, =, etc.) give the following result when applied to two values:
"1" if the relation is true
"0" if the relation is false
$ 6XEURXWLQHV
Subroutines may be the following types:
n internal,
n external user,
n external "Fixed Cycles ",
n optimised boring sections.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
$ ,QWHUQDOVXEURXWLQHV
These consist of a section of the program bounded by a starting label and the delimiter "%". This
type of subroutine is therefore contained within the main program.
$ ([WHUQDOXVHUVXEURXWLQHV
These are in practice a completely separate program, residing in a separate file. Their names
should not begin with G or P. It is distinguished from a main program because it is in the subroutine
directory and has program steps containing the piece dimensions preceded by comment
characters.
$ ([WHUQDO)L[HG&\FOHVVXEURXWLQHV
These are similar to user subroutines, but are in a special directory. Their name must begin with G
or P.
$ 6XEURXWLQHFDOO
([WHUQDOVXEURXWLQH
An external subroutine, whether user-defined or fixed cycle, is called using the instruction:
L=routine
where routine is the name of a user-defined subroutine, should its initial letter not be G or P, or
that of a fixed cycle.
One can perform an indirect call of an external subroutine, whether user-defined or fixed cycle, by
using the instruction:
LS[=]expr$
where expr$ is an expression with an alphanumeric string as its result, this string being the name
of the subroutine to be called. The reason for the designation "indirect" given to this instruction is
due to the fact that it is possible to pass the name of the subroutine to the call via a string
parameter, which can be modified as required beforehand.

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[$
,QWHUQDOVXEURXWLQH
On the other hand, an internal subroutine can be called with the instruction:
L:expr
where expr is the number of the label which indicates the start of the internal subroutine.
$ 6XEURXWLQHOHYHOV
Subroutines may be called from within subroutines, up to a maximum nesting level of 3. The
nesting level is visible during execution thanks to the names of the subroutines which precede the
start of the program step.
$ ([DPSOHRISURJUDPSDQFD
Main program "PANCA":
N10 G71 LX=1000 LY=700 LZ=53 HC1 Z=PRK

N15 XO5 YO5
N20 L=CPAN
N30 XO830 YO630 RT180
N40 L=CPAN
Subroutine "CPAN":
;N10 G71 LX=CPAN LY=600 LZ=53 HC1 Z=PRK

N20 X0 Y-20 Z=PRK PRZ=35 F6 G42 TP1 L=PON
N25 G4 X0 Y0 R50
N30 G1 X770 Y0
N35 G1 X770 Y53 BR20
N40 G1 X456.6 Y96.3 BR46
N45 X400 Y150 R44 G4 BR46
N50 X399.5 Y465 G1
N70 BT- I364 J465 G3
N80 BT+ I349 J444 G3
N90 BT+ I224 J566 G2
N100 BT+ I296 J429.5 G3
N110 G1 BT- BA240
N120 X98 Y434 R81 G4
N130 G6 X84 Y463
N140 BT+ I12.5 J424.5 G3
N150 X0 Y509 G5 R-150
N160 G1 X0 Y0
N170 X-20 Y-20 G1 G=40
N180 G0 L=POFF
N190 X15 Y40 T13 PRZ=20 L=G99

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$
$SSHQGL[$
N195 X15 Y420 T13 PRZ=20 L=G99

N210 X390 Y170 T12 PRZ=20 L=G99
N220 X500 Y79 T12 PRZ=20 L=G99
N230 X700 Y45 T12 L=G99

(a232h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[% (UURUPHVVDJHV
% 8VHULQWHUIDFHPHVVDJHV
These error messages are displayed in special popups, each of which contains the message code
and comment.
A B
A Message code.
B Message comment.
Before deleting the message, note down the code so that it can be communicated to the BIESSE
Service Department if necessary. After this, delete the message by pressing ENTER.
/LVWRIFRGH%PHVVDJHV
B1 - No profile selected
The user is trying to carry out operations that require the presence of a profile on the
EDITOR\PROGRAM page or on the AUTOMATIC\PROGRAM page.
B2 - No side selected
The user is trying to carry out operations on a profile whose elements are all unmachinable,
that is to say elements associated to side 0 or -1.
B3 - Non tangent elements SIDE %d

On side %d there are at least two elements that are not at a tangent. The two elements must
be divided into two distinct sides.
B4 - Non cont. elements SIDE %d

On side %d there are non adjacent elements, that is to say the end point in an element does
not coincide with the starting point in the next element. The two elements must be divided into
two distinct sides.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
B5 - Wrong edgeban. angles SIDE %d

On side %d there are at least two elements with bad edgebanding angles, that is to say the
end angle of an element does not coincide with the starting angle of the next element. The
angles must be suitably modified.
B6 - Ring error offset SIDE %d

The closed ring offset for side %d is greater than the machine data item “Saw-Glue dist.”. It is
necessary to set the exact value in the “Closed ring data” for side %d on the
EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B7 - Err. check glue roll. SIDE %d

The glue detachment advance in the closed ring on side %d is greater than the machine data
item “Saw-Glue dist.”. It is necessary to set the exact value in the “Closed ring data” for side
%d on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B8 - Select one element

Using the CURSOR keys, move to the profile element desired and press ENTER.
B9 - Too many points

During simulation of the edgebanding operation the distance between points is too low. The
user is advised to increase the value in the field “point Delta” on the EDITOR\SIMULATION
page.
B10 - Impossible to join the elements

It is not possible to join curved type machining operations and lines with a length smaller than
the value “Define” set on the EDITOR\SIMULATION page to the successive machining
operation.
B11 - Err. lim. cut 1 axes IX IY side %d

Axes IX and IY go beyond the limits during machining operation int1 on side %d. This
machining operation will not be performed.
B12 - Err. lim. cut 2 axes IX IY side %d

Axes IX and IY go beyond the limits during machining operation int2 on side %d. This
machining operation will not be performed.
B13 - No more el. available

There is no more memory space available for geometrical elements during calculation of
machining operations.
B14 - Error in profile justification

An error has occurred during calculation of profile justification.
B15 - Rotation speed beyond limits

The rotation speed exceeds the limits allowed. Re-enter a speed that is within the limits set in
the data for the corresponding electrospindle tool.
B16 - Suction cup interference

The suction cups are not positioned correctly within the profile. Press the menu <PData> on
the EDITOR\PROGRAM page, and set suitable pick-up co-ordinates.
B17 - Cutting interfer.

The panel interferes with the working dimensions during edge trimming operations. The user
% BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
is advised to remove the machining operation from the machining table on the
B18 - Length error SIDE %d

The profile of side %d to be edgebanded is not long enough to be machined. The error can
be avoided by increasing the length of the strip tail in the popup “Edge banding data” on the
EDITOR\PROGRAM page, or by decreasing the position of the presser in the popup “Panel
data” on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B19 - Length error starting clamp

The distance between glue-initial presser is 0. The value in the popup “Edge banding data” on
the GENERAL DATA page must be corrected.
B20 - Length error working clamp

The distance between glue-final presser is 0. The value in the popup “Edge banding data” on
the GENERAL DATA page must be corrected.
B21 - Length error of saw-glue roll distance

The distance between saw-glue is 0. The value in the popup “Edge banding data” on the
GENERAL DATA page must be corrected.
B22 - WRONG SIDES

There are at least two sides that belong by mistake to the same group, that is to say the final
element of one side is adjacent to the starting element of the other side. The two sides must
be assigned to separate groups.
B23 - WORKING OP. ERRORS SIDE %d

There are repeated machining operations on side %d. The machining operations in the
machining table on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page must be corrected.
B24 - Panel thickness err

The thickness of the panel is outside allowed limits. The exact value must be set in the “Panel
data” on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B25 - Edge thickness error SIDE %d

The thickness of the edge on side %d is outside allowed limits. The exact value must be set in
the “Edge banding data” for side %d on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B26 - Edge height error SIDE %d

The height of the edge on side %d is less than the thickness of the panel. The exact value
must be set in the “Edge banding data” for side %d on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B27 - Edgebanding error SIDE %d

The tail on side %d is longer than the machine data element “Saw-Glue Dist.”. The exact
value must be set in the “Edge banding data” for side %d on the EDITOR\PROGRAM page.
B28 - Start trimming err SIDE %d

The head on side %d is longer than half the machine data element “Diam. Copy in X”. The
exact value must be set in the “Double edge trimming data” for side %d on the
B29 - End trimming err SIDE %d

The tail on side %d is longer than half the machine data element “Diam. Copy in X”. The exact

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
value must be set in the “Double edge trimming data” for side %d on the EDITOR\PROGRAM
page.
B30 - Wrong value!

The order in which axes are moved is not correct with respect to the panel type toggle.
B31 - Trimm.op.not finish SIDE %d

The double edge trimming operation on side %d will not be completed to avoid axes X and Y
passing beyond limits and blocking the machine.
B32 - Unvalid axis combination!

The order in which axes are moved is not correct with respect to the panel type toggle.
B33 - Band.op. limit err.

The edgebanding operation cannot be performed, because axes X and Y would pass beyond
limits and block the machine. If possible, this error should be avoided by pivoting the profile in
a suitable manner.
B34 - Statistics speed variation error

There are elements in the profile in which the value Speed var. exceeds the limits.
B35 - Swivelling not calculated

It is not possible to calculate pivoting of the profile. If possible, this error should be avoided by
modifying the pivoting angles or by increasing the panel data element Machine Tol. to a
suitable value.
B36 - Line error %d : %s

While reading file %s incorrect data have been found on line %d.
/LVWRIFRGH&PHVVDJHV
C1 - %d and %d NOT ADJAC.

The two elements indicated are not adjacent; i.e. the end point of the preceding element does
not coincide with the starting point of the next element. Check the exactness of the profile.
C2 - Opening file.....
A file opening operation has failed. The file might be damaged or missing.
C3 - El. not adjacent!

Error on the profile, which contains “gaps”; i.e. the end point of the preceding element does
not coincide with the starting point of the next element.
C4 - Calc profile direction

The function which calculates the direction of the profile triggers an error. This is a special
type of profile which cannot be managed by the system.
C5 - ERROR Compens.
Compensation error on the element corresponding to the number specified in the line below.
C6 - NO PROFILE
There are no profiles present.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
C7 - Bad connection
C8 - Connection dir
Error in calculation of the connection.
C9 - Parallel lines
C10 - Parallel arcs

An error has occurred during calculation of the element parallel to the current element. This
may be because the tool diameter is too large or because the end points of an element have
not been calculated accurately.
C11 - Line-Line connect
C12 - Large tool diameter

The tool diameter is too large and does not allow compensation of some elements in the
profile (e.g. circle with radius smaller than that of the tool).
C13 - Line-Arc connecti
C14 - Aec-Line connecti
C15 - Arc-Arc connection

Errors in the connection between two elements.
C16 - Imposs NO CONNECT

It is impossible to compensate this profile with the NO CONNECTION SETUP flag. Change
the value in the SETUP menu.
C17 - Overlapping
The compensated profile has some parts that overlap, which may be because the profiles are
not correct, i.e. they have been created with “loops” or with an incorrect diameter.
C18 - Nil tool radius !

A compensation has been requested without specifying the tool radius.
C19 - OUT OF MEMORY!

The space available for saving profiles has been filled.
C20 - IN/OUT ERROR

The lead-in/lead-out calculation routine has triggered an error. If an overlap delta is present, it
might be too large.
C21 - BAD PROFILE

The profile is not correct. See the example mentioned in errors C1 and C3.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
/LVWRIFRGH(PHVVDJHV
E1 - data damaged
Incorrect data have been found while reading the file.
E2 - TOO MANY BORINGS

There are too many bores in the program or in the optimiser.
E3 - TOO MANY PROG LINES

There are too many lines in the program.
E4 - TOO MANY PROFILES

There are too many profiles in the program.
E5 - TOO MANY EL IN PROF

There are too many elements in the profile.
E6 - work list line error

The user has requested running of a list line containing an error.
E7 - name missing
The user has attempted to write or save a file without giving it a name.
E8 - no program selected
No program has been selected for running.
E9 - express.calc. error
Error in calculation of an expression.
E10 - boring type error

A bore with incorrect data has been found.
E11 - boring downstroke error

Incorrect data relating to a group of optimised bores.
E12 - program too long

Program with too many lines to allow running.
E13 - machining error

Error in the data which do not relate to a process present in the assisted editor on the line
specified below. If the program contains jumps, the line indicated might not coincide with the
one in the assisted editor.
E14 - spindle missing

Check the head configuration to see whether the spindle used for this operation is present.
E15 - mirror spindle missing

Check the head configuration to see whether the spindle symmetrical to the one used for this
operation is present.
E16 - spindle bit missing

No bit on the spindle.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
E17 - mirror bit missing

No bit on the SYMMETRICAL spindle.
E18 - spindle dir error

Discrepancy between the machining plane and the spindle axis.
E19 - boring side error

Bore with incorrect side data.
E20 - mir.spind. axis error

Incorrect data for the axis of the symmetrical spindle.
E21 - boring corner error

Bore with incorrect corner data.
E22 - tangent calc.error

Error in calculation of the tangencies between adjacent elements; increase the tolerance
angle.
E23 - compensation error

An error has occurred during compensation.
E24 - min+max spds. mismatch

The rotation speeds are incongruent. The minimum is > the maximum or vice versa. Check
the data relating to the point, the electrospindle and the aggregate, if any aggregate is used
on the SYMMETRICAL SPINDLE.
E25 - nil speeds

The entry and/or interpolation speeds for the machining operation are equal to zero. Check
the data entered for the machining operation and similar speeds used in the machine data.
E26 - router axis error

Error in the spindle axis.
E27 - mir.router axis error

Error in the symmetrical spindle axis.
E28 - rotat.speed mismatch

The spindle bit rotation speed and that of any aggregate that may be fitted are incongruous.
E29 - bit missing

The bit of the spindle or electrospindle requested is missing.
E30 - mirror router missing

There is no symmetrical spindle present.
E31 - mirror aggreg. missing

There is no symmetrical slot in the aggregate fitted with the bit requested.
E32 - mirror agg. bit missing

There is no bit fitted on the symmetrical aggregate.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
E33 - origin disabled

The origin specified in the program data has not been enabled.
E34 - side or corner error

Incorrect data for the side or corner of the bore.
E35 - out of SW range Y

In order to make the bore, the spindle bit used goes beyond the sw limits on the Y axis; see
the relative axis data.
E36 - out of SW range Z

In order to make the bore, the spindle bit used goes beyond the sw limits on the Z axis; see
the relative axis data.
E37 - optimisation error

An error has occurred during boring optimisation.
E38 - bad password

To access this function it is necessary to enter the password indicated on the maintenance
page.
E39 - err saving axes data

The axis data have not been changed. The machine may be in the wrong conditions for
saving of new parameters; switch it to manual or to emergency mode.
E40 - TOO MANY ORIGINS

There are too many origins in the data file.
E41 - TOO MANY SPINDLEBITS

There are too many spindle bits in the data file.
E42 - TOO MANY ROUTERBITS

There are too many ELECTROSPINDLE bits in the data file.
E43 - unchanged - drw miss.

1) The drawing associated to the profile has been deleted, so that the profile cannot be
modified by changing its parameters;
2) Operations have been performed on the profile which mean it can no longer be modified.
E44 - in error
An error has occurred during input of the lead-in.
E45 - out error

An error has occurred during input of the lead-out.
E46 - label missing

In the program or in the list there is a jump to a missing label.
E47 - work list line error

This list line cannot be executed.
E48 - assigned inst. error

Error in the assignment instruction.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
E49 - assigned div by 0

Division by zero in the assignment instruction.
E50 - IF instr. error

Error in the if .... instruction.
E51 - fill error

Error in the instruction for filling the profile with parallel lines.
E52 - axes interp. speed=0

Check the value relating to the axis interpolation speed in the axis parameters page.
E53 - axes interp. acc=0

Check the value relating to the axis interpolation acceleration in the axis parameters page.
E54 - lookahead error

The profile for which the working speeds have to be calculated has an incorrect number of
elements, or the speed is too low for profile execution.
E55 - tool length error

Tool length = 0.
E56 - in on lines
The 3D_CA lead-in can only be placed on lines parallel to the co-ordinate axes, and the one
for 3D_LA can only be placed on lines.
E57 - out on lines

The 3D_CA lead-out can only be placed on lines parallel to the co-ordinate axes, and the one
for 3D_LA can only be placed on lines.
E58 fill not managed

In the case of machining on surface 5C, fill is not managed.
E59 compensation missing

In the case of machining on surface 5C compensation of the profile is necessary.
E60 Slot not enabled

The slot on which the bit being used is fitted is not enabled.
E61 Input RA90/LA90 missing

The operation can only be carried out using input RA90 or LA90
E62 Output RA90/LA90 missing

The operation can only be carried out using output RA90 or LA90
E63 Incongruent directions

The direction of rotation of the bit does not coincide with that of the electrospindle.
E64 Subroutine param.

Error in evaluation of a parameter in the subroutine.
E65 Unknown block

The name of a block not declared in the DXF setup has been found while reading a DXF file.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
E66 Unknown layer

The name of a layer not declared in the DXF setup has been found while reading a DXF file.
E67 INSERT layer error

Error while reading the INSERT level of a DXF file.
/LVWRIFRGH*PHVVDJHV
G0 - End available elem.

The elements available for the profiles have run out.
G1 - NIL Length segment
G2 - NIL Length arc
G3 - NIL elements
Elements of length nil have been inserted in the profile. The program will delete them
automatically.
G4 - DEFAULT elements
Following modifications to the drawing, an element that was formerly bound to other elements
in the drawing has been separated from them and has become of DEFAULT type.
G5 - Profile NOT MODIFIED

The modifications made to the base drawing or the choice of parameters is incorrect, so that
the profile cannot be obtained from the new drawing. Reload the file and insert correct values
for the parameters.
G6 - Profile NOT UPDATED

Same as G5.
G7 - End prof. number

The profiles available are finished.
G8 - End DRAWING elem

The basic geometrical elements available for construction of profiles have run out.
G9 - End PROFILES
The profiles available are finished.
G10 - DRW CREATE ERROR

An error has occurred in the geometric drawing, probably due to the choice of a solution that
generates an element a long way outside the panel.
G11 - CLOSED PROFILE

An operation that can only be performed on an open profile has been requested for a profile
that, on the contrary, is closed.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
G12 - Delta NOT added

An error has occurred in the delta between lead-in and lead-out. Try decreasing the value of
the delta or leading-in on another element. Check that the profile is a closed one.
G13 - Profile NOT OK

The profile chosen is not suitable for the operation requested. For example, the user has
requested to create a connecting section on a profile that is not related to geometry.
G14 - OPEN PROFILE !!

An operation that can only be performed on a closed profile has been requested for a profile
that, on the contrary, is open.
G15 - FILLING PROFILE !!

An error has occurred in the fill calculation routine; check the parameters given to the FILL.
G16 - NON-EXISTING ELEMENT

The geometrical element chosen does not exist; check the label.
G17 - IN - OUT
The lead-in/lead-out routine has terminated with an error.
G18 - SAVING DRAWING

The program cannot save on the disk due to lack of dynamic memory space. Free a little RAM
memory.
G19 - DELTA TOO LARGE

An error has occurred in the delta between lead-in and lead-out. Try decreasing the value of
the delta or leading-in on another element.
G20 - ELEMENT Type ERROR

The element selected is not correct. Check the label entered.
G21 - Select prof. beginning

The starting point of the profile has not been selected correctly.
G22 - Only elem accepted" " *** POINT ! ***

Only point type elements are accepted in the function creating profiles by joining up points.
G23 - Non-existing profile

The profile does not exist in the memory.
G24 - Duplicated parameters

It is not possible to copy two profiles using the same parameters on a single panel, or to copy
the same profile.
G25 - Too Many Param. !!

Too many parameters have been entered (error in copying, when the parameters for the
profile to be copied will no longer fit into the table of the original profile).
G26 - Nil Fill Distance

The FILL distance parameter is incorrect; enter a value other than 0.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
G27 - Profile not present

The profile is not present in the memory
G28 - Not enough points

The number of points entered for the Profile By Points routine is insufficient (there must be at
least 3).
G29 - Bad profile number

There is no profile with this number in the memory.
/LVWRIFRGH0PHVVDJHV
M1 - Lines do not exist!..

The lines indicated in the POPUP do not exist.
M2 - One line does not exist! ...

One line indicated in the POPUP does not exist.
M3 - Lines are parallel!

The lines chosen must intersect.
M4 - Insert 2 diff. points!

The two points must not coincide.
M5 - 1st point does not exist!

The point does not exist on the drawing: check the label.
M6 - 2nd point does not exist!

M7 - 3rd point does not exist!

M8 - Ins. values diff. from 0!

Insert at least one value other than 0.
M9 - Point does not exist!

M10 - Line does not exist!

The line does not exist on the drawing: check the label.
M11 - Circum. does not exist

The circumference does not exist on the drawing: check the label.
M12 - No element added!
M13 - No more elem. available

There is no more room in the memory for geometrical elements.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
M14 - Drawing creation ERROR

An error has occurred in the geometric drawing, probably due to the choice of a solution that
generates an element a long way outside the panel.
M15 - No more prof. available!

There is no more room in the memory for profiles.
M16 - Circle does not exist

M17 - Line external to circle

The line does not intersect the circle.
M18 - Line does not exist

M19 - 2nd Circle does not exist

M20 - 1st Circle does not exist

M21 - Circles not secant

The circles do not intersect.
M22 - Infinite intersections

The circles coincide or are concentric.
M23 - No intersection
The circles are external.
M24 - Pt. intern. to circum.

The point is inside the circumference: there is no geometrical solution.
M25 - Coinciding circles

The circles coincide
M26 - Secant circles: SOL 3 & 4

Choose one of the two solutions offered.
M27 - Insufficient radius

Increase the value of the radius or change geometrical solution.
M28 - Circ. with negative rad.

The radius of the concentric circle is negative: change the delta value.
M29 - Parallel lines

The lines must intersect.
M30 - Inadequate radius

Change the value of the radius or change geometrical solution.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
M31 - Circle non-existent SOL

M32 - Infinite solutions!

The geometrical elements in question do not intersect.
M33 - Radius too small

M34 - Radius too large

M35 - Valid SOL: 4 and 8

Choose one of the two solutions offered.
M36 - ERROR modified drawing

The modification requested overturns the bonds between drawing elements.
M37 - Element NOT on profile

Error displayed during creation of the profile when the user chooses a point which does not
actually belong to the profile element as starting or end point.
M38 - Path! Profile end

Error displayed during creation of the profile when the user chooses a point which does not
actually belong to the profile element as starting or end point.
M39 - Enter FIRST POINT

The first point of the profile has not been entered! Restart from the beginning.
M40 - Select. not unique! (lin)

The straight lines must intersect.
M41 - 1st line does not exist !
M42 - 2nd line does not exist

M43 - Round: parallel lines

M44 - Round: coinciding lines

M45 - Non adjacent elements

The profile elements to be connected and/or bevelled must be consecutive and must
intersect.
M46 - ROUNDING error

Bevel error: check the distance set.
M47 - Select. not unique! (cir)

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
M48 - 1st element does not exist
M49 - 2nd element does not exist

The element chosen is not correct. Check the label entered.
M50 - Connline:external elem.

The profile elements to be connected and/or bevelled must be consecutive and must
intersect.
M51 - CONNECTION error

Error in connection: check the radius entered.
M52 - POINT OUT OF PROFILE

The point selected does not lie on the profile: check the co-ordinates.
M53 - Cannot save data

The data saving directory does not exist, or there is not enough RAM memory.
M54 - NO PROFILE
No suitable profile exists.
/LVWRIFRGH8PHVVDJHV
U1 - file copy failed
U2 - table full
Data on file corrupted.
U3 - long expression
U4 - wrong KEYWORD
U5 - bad comment
An incorrect comment has been found. The data on file might be corrupted.
U6 - data on file corrupted
U7 - bad string
An incorrect string has been found. The data on file might be corrupted.
U8 - bad symbol
An incorrect string has been found on the data file. The data on file might be corrupted.
U9 - Error on file

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
U10 - syntax error

The expression evaluator has found a syntax error in the expression.
U11 - brackets missing

Brackets missing in the expression.
U12 - expression missing

The symbol to be evaluated does not have a name.
U13 - division by 0
Calculation of the expression contains a division by zero.
U14 - unknown parameter

The user is using parameters that have not been defined beforehand, and so cannot be used
to calculate another expression.
U15 - parameter present

The user is trying to enter a parameter with the same name as an existing parameter.
U16 - ’.’ not permitted

The full stop is not a permitted character.
U17 - not enough memory
U18 - error opening file

The file sought is not present in the memory
U19 - error writing file
U20 - error reading file
U21 - flash writing error
U22 - flash deleting error
U23 - cannot be modified

The user wishes to delete or modify a parameter that is used in the program
U24 - root less than 0

The user is trying to calculate the square root of a number smaller than 0.
U25 Incorrect file name

The name of the file to be saved contains invalid characters. The characters accepted are:
0..9 , a..z , A..Z , _ .

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
% 0DFKLQHPHVVDJHV
These error messages are displayed in the special bar found in the page headings. Each message
is made up of a code and a comment. Before deleting the message, note down the code so that it
can be signalled to the BIESSE service department, if necessary. After this, press the CLEAR
button on the command unit to cancel the message.
The messages described below may be followed by 1 or 2 numbers (parameters) in brackets,

which indicate the object to which they refer. There are two possibilities:
(par) the parameter par always follows the description of the error;
[par] the parameter par does not always follow the description of the error.
Description of the most common parameters
1. (cen) stands for work centre (on single centre machines it is always 0).
2. (slot) stands for the slot number; the possible values are:
0 ==> slot A
1 ==> slot B
2 ==> slot C
3 ==> slot D
4 ==> slot E
5 ==> slot F
Description of the most common abbreviations
MS stands for Machine-side.

CS stands for Carriage-side.
HS stands for Head-side.
/LVWRI(&1BPHVVDJHV
ECN_0-Sys Err
Axis control system error:
1. a manual axis reset has been commanded, but the NC does not respond;
2. a manual axis stop jog has been commanded, but the NC does not respond;
3. an NC axis reset has been commanded, but the NC does not respond;
4. axis enabling has been commanded, but the NC does not respond.
ECN_1-Machine not zeroed

An attempt has been made to execute a program without zeroing the machine. Press Stop
and reset, carry out zeroing and repeat.
ECN_2-Machine already in Start

Program start with machine already in automatic mode, Warning message.
ECN_3-Press Stop+Reset
The operations requested are not permitted, Warning message.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
ECN_4-Encoder checking routine KO

The axis encoder checking routine has detected an error. Turn the machine off and back on
again and repeat zeroing operations.
ECN_5-Quantity >= Pieces machined

Start command for a work list line with quantity of pieces machined greater than or equal to
the quantity of pieces to be machined.
ECN_6-Machining impossible (cen) (slot)

The program being carried out on the centre (cen) requires a machining operation to be
performed with the slot (slot) that is considered impossible; the possible circumstances are:
1. cutting with C axis without blade aggregate fitted on the active TP;
2. boring with C axis on a plane other than XY (plane 5);
3. boring with C axis without boring aggregate fitted on the active TP;
4. machining on plane 5C without boring aggregate fitted on the active TP.
Check the program and try again.
ECN_7-Too many active slots

An attempt has been made to perform an operation on a non-existant TP; the possible
circumstances are:
1. instruction M for unloading of non-existent TP.
ECN_8-Jog impossible without selecting axes

An attempt has been made to jog an axis without first selecting it (by pressing <ENTER> on
the icon).
ECN_9-Cannot change parameters: axes active

It is not possible to change the axis parameters when they are active. Press Stop and Reset
and try again.
ECN_10-Axis acceleration = 0 (cen) (ax)

For the axis (ax) of the centre (cen) the acceleration machine data item = 0. Not permitted;
change the machine data item.
ECN_11-Axis over software DW limit switch (ax)

The program running requires the axis (ax) to be moved beyond the software DW limit switch.
ECN_12-Axis over software UP limit switch (ax)

The program running requires the axis (ax) to be moved beyond the software UP limit switch.
ECN_13-Axis alarm
The NC has triggered an alarm in one or more axes, and as a result the PLC has switched the
machine to emergency mode. Supply power to the system and give the command for a total
reset.
ECN_14-Inverter type not allowed (inv)

The type of inverter (inv) indicated in the plc table “PLC_INV” is not amongst those envisaged
and managed by the PLC. Check the data item in question.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
ECN_15-El.spindle rotation out of range (inv)

The working speed of the electrospindle controlled by the inverter (inv) exceeds the tolerance
of 10% of the speed desired.
ECN_16-Timeout for reaching Inv. operating speed (inv)

The electrospindle piloted by the inverter (inv) does not reach the required rotation speed.
The machine stops.
ECN_17-Timeout for Inverter stopped (inv)

The electrospindle piloted by the inverter (inv) does not reach the required rotation speed.
ECN_18-Inverter acceleration ramp = 0 Def 5.0

An attempt has been made to operate the inverter with acceleration ramp zero: the operation
is impossible and by default the PLC uses a ramp of 5 sec. Check the electrospindle data and
the bit data.
ECN_19-Inverter deceleration ramp = 0 Def 5.0

An attempt has been made to operate the inverter with deceleration ramp zero: the operation
is impossible and by default the PLC uses a ramp of 5 sec. Check the electrospindle data and
the bit data.
ECN_20-INV system call error (inv)

An attempt to communicate with the inverter (inv) has failed.
ECN_21-INV parameter out of range (inv)

A parameter outside the range has been transmitted to the inverter (inv).
ECN_22-INV transmission timeout (inv)

ECN_23-INV transmission interrupted (inv)

ECN_24-INV CheckSum reception error (inv)

ECN_25-INV reception NAK (inv)

ECN_26-Bit thickness < Working depth (cen) (tp)

The program being carried out on the centre (cen) wants to use the TP (tp) in a machining
operation having a depth greater than the thickness of the bit fitted. Check the program and
try again.
ECN_27-Entry speed=0 (setting 1 m./min) (cen) (slot)

The program being carried out on the centre (cen) wants to use a slot (slot) in a machining
operation having an entry speed zero. Warning message: the PLC will set a speed of 1m/min.
Check the program.
ECN_28-Interp. speed=0 (setting 1 m./min) (cen) (slot)

operation having an interpolation speed zero. Warning message: the PLC will set a speed of
1m/min. Check the program.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
ECN_29-LH bit on RH spindle or RHINV (cen) (tp)

The bit fitted to the electrospindle (tp) of centre (cen) has a direction of rotation incompatible
with that of the spindle. Check the Tooling data and try again.
ECN_30-RH bit on LH spindle or LHINV (cen) (tp)

The bit fitted to the electrospindle (tp) of centre (cen) has a direction of rotation incompatible
with that of the spindle. Check the Tooling data and try again.
ECN_31-Operation impossible even with slide up (cen) (slot)

operation that is impossible even with the slide up, due to the Z dimensions involved. To
decide what slide stroke to use, the PLC takes into consideration the length of the bit, the
thickness of the panel, the safety position for the type of machining operation and the TP
corrector and the DW limit switch for axis Z. Check the program and the tooling.
ECN_32-Loading from unreachable TH (tp) (npu)

Loading on the TP (tp) of the tool fitted on the tool holder (npu) has been commanded, but in
the tool holder data the TP is not enabled to use it. Check the program, the tool holder data,
and the tooling.
ECN_33-Unloading to unreachable TH (tp) (npu)

Unloading from the TP (tp) of the tool fitted on the tool holder (npu) has been commanded,
but in the tool holder data the TP is not enabled to use it. Check the program, the tool holder
data, and the tooling.
ECN_34-Unloading impossible: TH not found (tp)

Unloading from the TP (tp) of the tool fitted on the tool holder (npu) has been commanded,
but it is not possible to find the tool holder on which to unload it from the active tooling data.
Check the program and the tooling.
ECN_35-Final radius != Initial radius (cen)

The program being run on the centre (cen) wishes to make a curve with an initial radius
different from the final radius: impossible. Check the program.
ECN_36-Timeout for axis tolerance (cen) (ax)

The last positioning of the axis (ax) on the centre (cen) does not comply with the tolerance
foreseen.
ECN_37-Curve 3D or with Zi!=Zf impossible on Table 5C (cen)

The program running on the centre (cen) wants to make a 3D curve or a curve with a variation
in depth (XYZ spiral) on table 5C: this is impossible because the linear axis can only be Z or
C. Check the program.
ECN_38-Fixed cycle does not exist (cen)

The program running on the centre (cen) wants to make a vertical bore, but the cycle to be
used has not been specified in the “Bit cycles” data. Check the “Bit cycles” data and try again.
ECN_41-Drive Parameters Not saved (Upl) or Not Loaded (Dwn)

The drive parameters (NC...) have not been saved. The save must be performed with the
emergency mushroom head button pressed.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
ECN_42-Drive Error: see axis Mecstat on Debug page

A drive error is present: look at the type of error indicated in the field Mecstat on the Manual,
Debug page, and consult the YASKAWA manual.
/LVWRIFRGH(UUPHVVDJHV
Err 1 - Non rest machine. Reset axes.

Each time the machine is turned on, before switching to automatic it is necessary to zero the
axes. The zeroing operation must be carried out in manual mode. To change to manual mode,
ensure that the machine is not in emergency mode and then press STOP and RESET.
Err 2 - Manual reset impossible.

Manual zeroing is only possible if the machine is in manual mode. To change to manual
mode, ensure that the machine is not in emergency mode and then press STOP and RESET.
Err 3 - Machine in emergency. Check emergency lines. Press START. IN8=1 11151
The machine is in emergency mode, either because one of the emergency buttons has been
pressed, or because a protection device has triggered. Check the emergency lines. Press the
luminous green START button. If the cause of the emergency has been eliminated the green
button will light up, and input 8 of the PLC will go to 1. Press the RESET button to enable the
auxiliary power supplies.
Err 4 - X axis drive KO. Check drive. IN9=1 18461

The drive for the axis in question is not OK. This may occur when the machine is switched on,
or due to a malfunction when the machine is operating. The PLC triggers a machine
emergency. Check the drive display to find out which error has occurred and remedy it. Input
9 on the PLC (Drive OK) must be set to 1.
Err 5 - Y axis drive KO. Check drive. IN10=1 18561

Err 6 - Z axis drive KO. Check drive. IN11=1 18661

Err 7 - C axis drive KO. Check drive. IN12=1 18761

Err 8 – AB axis drive KO. Check drive. IN13=1 90061


(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 9 – TV axis inverter KO Check inverter

The TV axis inverter is not OK. Check it, and replace if necessary.
Err 10 – Automatic reset impossible. Press STOP + RESET.

Automatic zeroing is only possible when the machine is in manual mode. To change to
manual mode, ensure that the machine is not in emergency mode and then press STOP and
RESET.
Err 11 – Automatic sequences active. Press STOP + RESET.

The user has attempted to perform a command that is incompatible with automatic mode. To
restore the correct operating conditions, press STOP and RESET.
Err 12 – Mach. data: max acc. or max int. acc. = 0. Check data.
The value of the data item “Max acc.” (maximum acceleration) or “Max int. acc.” (maximum
interpolation acceleration) has been wrongly set to zero for at least one axis. Check the
values given to these parameters for all the axes, and correct if necessary.
Err 13 – Cannot change parameters. Axes are active.

The user has tried to change the axis parameters with the machine in automatic mode. To
change the parameters, the machine must be in manual. To change to manual mode, ensure
that the machine is not in emergency mode and then press STOP and RESET.
Err 14 – X axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the X axis beyond the lower software
limit switch. Check the program and try again.
Err 15 – Y axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the Y axis beyond the lower software
Err 16 – Z axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the Z axis beyond the lower software
Err 17 – C axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the C axis beyond the lower software
Err 18 – AB axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the AB axis beyond the lower software
Err 19 – TV axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the TV axis beyond the lower software
Err 20 – IX axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the IX axis for the edge trimming side
beyond the lower software limit switch. Check the program and try again.
Err 21 – IY axis commanded beyond lower software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the IY axis for the edge trimming side
beyond the lower software limit switch. Check the program and try again.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 22 – Encoder control routine KO.

An internal routine continually checks that the encoders are in full working order to prevent
any accidental escape of the axes. It is necessary to perform appropriate tests on the
efficiency of the encoders.
Err 23 – Axis parameters not saved.

The change requested in the axis parameters has not been made. Press STOP and RESET
and try again.
Err 24 – Inputs to cylinder both ON. Check inputs.

In normal conditions only one of the inputs fitted on the cylinders must be active to indicate
the position of the cylinders themselves. Check the sensors.
Err 25 – EV commanded to rest pos.: not started. Check EV.

The electrovalve has been commanded to go to the rest position, but the active position
sensor has not switched to OFF to signal that movement has taken place. Check that there
are no mechanical impediments. Perform electric and pneumatic tests on the electrovalve.
Err 26 – EV commanded to rest pos.: not arrived. Check inputs.

The electrovalve has been commanded to go to the rest position, but the relative sensor has
not switched to ON to signal that movement has taken place. Check that there are no
mechanical impediments. Check the sensors.
Err 27 – EV commanded to active pos.: not started. Check EV.

The electrovalve has been commanded to go to the active position, but the rest position
sensor has not switched to OFF to signal that movement has taken place. Check that there
are no mechanical impediments. Perform electric and pneumatic tests on the electrovalve.
Err 28 – EV commanded to active pos.: not arrived. Check inputs.

The electrovalve has been commanded to go to the active position, but the relative sensor
has not switched to ON to signal that movement has taken place. Check that there are no
mechanical impediments. Check the sensors.
Err 29 – Spiral movement impossible.

An impossible spiral movement (i.e. a circular interpolation on two axes and a linear
interpolation on a third axis) has been programmed. Selection of the axes is probably
incorrect. Check the program.
Err 30 – Serial transmission to inverter failed. Press STOP + RESET.

Serial transmission between NC and inverter has failed. Press STOP and RESET and try
again.
Err 31 – Inverter rotation Out of Range. Press STOP + RESET.

The rotation speed (inverter output frequency) is outside the limits envisaged for the motor
used. Press STOP and RESET and try again.
Err 32 – System error – Inverter not initialised. Press STOP + RESET.

System error. The inverter parameters have not been initialised. Press STOP and RESET
and try again.
Err 33 – Inverter working speed timeout exp. Press STOP + RESET.

The time allowed for the inverter to reach working frequency has expired. Press STOP and
RESET and try again.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 34 – Inverter acceleration ramp = 0 (default = 5.0 sec.).

The acceleration ramp set for the inverter is 0 sec. The control by default will set a value of
5.0 sec.
Err 35 – Inverter deceleration ramp = 0 (default = 5.0 sec.).

The deceleration ramp set for the inverter is 0 sec. The control by default will set a value of
5.0 sec.
Err 36 – not used.
Err 40 – No position sensor active on presser. Check sensors.

The presser may not be in one of the working positions foreseen, or the sensors may not
indicate the actual position of the presser. Check the sensors.
Err 41 – Presser has not reached position POS1 (min). Check sensors.
The presser has been commanded to the position closest to the glue roller (POS1) but has
not reached this position. Check that there are no mechanical impediments. Check the
sensors.
Err 42 – Presser has not reached position POS2 (max). Check sensors.
The presser has been commanded to the intermediate position with respect to the glue roller
(POS2) but has not reached this position. Check that there are no mechanical impediments.
Check the sensors.
Err 44 – Presser position sensor search failed. Check sensors.

During presser positioning the search for the relative sensor has failed. Check that there are
no mechanical impediments. Check the sensors.
Err 45 – More than one position sensor active on presser. Check sensors.
More than one presser position sensor is active at the same time. Check the sensors.
Err 46 – Bad presser positioning command. Check sensors.

The positioning command sent to the presser is not coherent with the active sensor
configuration. Check the sensors.
Err 47 – Banding strip compensation excessive. Check strip, container, AB encoder.

Banding strip length compensation at the end of a closed ring edgebanding operation has an
excessively high value. Check that the edge banding strip in the container is not finished.
Check that the edge banding strip advance (AB) encoder is in the read position (forwards)
and that it is working properly.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 48 – Panel fastened to suction cups. Unload the panel.

Before setting the machine to automatic the user must check to ensure that the suction cup
side of the pick-up unit is free. If there is a panel fastened to it the machine must be set to
manual and the cycle unloading the panel (to the loading or unloading pallet) must be
activated.
Err 49 – Warning: insufficient banding strip in container. IN38=1 91131

The photocell checking the amount of banding strip in the container indicates that it is
insufficient. Replace the roll of banding strip. If necessary, check the position of the photocell
with respect to the roll.
Err 50 – Lubrication due. Perform manual lubrication.

Manual type lubrication system: the set period since the last lubrication cycle has expired.
Lubricate the points foreseen in the manual. Press SMCL to reset the hour counter and
cancel the error message.
Err 51 – No lubricant in tank. Add lubricant. IN23=1 29431.

Automatic type lubrication system: the lubricant is at minimum level. Check the level and top
up if necessary. If necessary, check PLC input 23.
Err 52 – Auto. lubric. cycle not finished. Waiting for 2 raise fronts IN24 29441.
Automatic type lubrication system: the automatic cycle terminates after receiving 2 raise
fronts from input 24 (S1097). If necessary, check PLC input 24 and the elements in the
lubrication system.
Err 53 - Warning: INPUT xx and INPUT yy both ACTIVE. Check INPUTS.

In pairs of INPUTS that must normally be active one at a time: this indicates erroneous
simultaneous activation of the two INPUTS that are dynamically indicated in the message.
Check the electrical state of these INPUTS.
Err 54 – X axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the X axis beyond the upper software
Err 55 – Y axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the Y axis beyond the upper software
Err 56 – Z axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the Z axis beyond the upper software
Err 57 – C axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the C axis beyond the upper software
Err 58 – AB axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the AB axis beyond the upper software
Err 59 – TV axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the TV axis beyond the upper software

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 60 – IX axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the IX axis on the edge trimming side
beyond the upper software limit switch. Check the program and try again.
Err 61 – IY axis commanded beyond upper software limit switch.

The program being run contains a request to position the IY axis on the edge trimming side
beyond the upper software limit switch. Check the program and try again.
Err 63 – Axes alarm from NC (see DEBUG). Press STOP + RESET
Err 64 – System error – Axis movement KO. Press STOP + RESET. Reset the axes.
System error. Press STOP and RESET and try again.
Err 65 – Insufficient vacuum. Check vacuum pump. IN62=1 26141.

The vacuum in the vacuum system is not sufficient to guarantee locking of the panel to the
pick-up unit suction cups. The red lamp on the electric panel flashes to indicate this problem.
Check the vacuum pump and if necessary the indicator vacuostat.
Err 66 – Compressed air supply KO. Check pressure gauge. IN32=1 10721.
The pressure in the compressed air supply line is insufficient. The machine will not exit
emergency mode. Check the supply system and if necessary the indicator manostat.
Err 67 – Loading pallet inverter KO. Check inverter. IN27=1 98361

No OK signal has been sent to the PLC by the loading pallet inverter. Check the inverter and
input 27.
Err 68 – Glue bowl temp. KO. Check regulator and resistors. IN0=1 (S9092) 90981
The temperature reached by the glue bowl is not sufficient to enable rotation of the glue roller
and therefore edgebanding operations. Check the temperature set on the regulator in
question. If necessary, check that the bowl heating resistors are working properly.
Err 69 – Glue roller temp. KO. Check regulator and resistors. IN1=1 (S9092) 90982
The temperature reached by the glue roller is not sufficient to enable it to rotate and therefore
to allow edgebanding operations. Check the temperature set on the regulator in question. If
necessary, check that the roller heating resistors are working properly.
Err 70 – Vacuum pump thermomag. switch KO. IN3=1 (F14211) 10112

The thermomagnetic switch protecting the vacuum pump has triggered. Check the state of
the pump. If necessary, check PLC input 3. To exit emergency mode, press the luminous
green START button. If the cause of the emergency has been removed the green button will
light up and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the auxiliary power supplies.
Err 71 – Aux. Prot. KO. IN4=1 (F18121, F8311, F8331, F8111, F8211, F8251, F8411) 10172
One of the protections indicated in the message has triggered. Check the protections
involved. If necessary, check PLC input 4. To exit emergency mode, press the luminous green
START button. If the cause of the emergency has been removed the green button will light up
and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the auxiliary power supplies.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 72 – Thermoregulators thermomag. switch KO. IN5=1 (F90901) 10191

The thermomagnetic switch protecting the thermoregulators has triggered. Check the state of
the thermoregulators. If necessary, check PLC input 5. To exit emergency mode, press the
luminous green START button. If the cause of the emergency has been removed the green
button will light up and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the auxiliary power
supplies.
Err 73 – Prot.Mot.Ref./Int. KO IN6=1 (F95311, F95411, F16331, F16341, F16431) 10213

One of the protections indicated in the message has triggered. Check the protections
involved. If necessary, check PLC input 6. To exit emergency mode, press the luminous green
START button. If the cause of the emergency has been removed the green button will light up
and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the auxiliary power supplies.
Err 74 – Unloading roller bed thermomag. switch KO. IN26=1 (F14211) 98441
The thermomagnetic switch protecting the roller bed has triggered. Check the state of the
roller bed. If necessary, check PLC input 26. To exit emergency mode, press the luminous
green START button. If the cause of the emergency has been removed the green button will
light up and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the auxiliary power supplies.
Err 75 – Emerg. Butt. STOP IN7=1 (S11011A, S11011B, S11011C, S11011D, S11011E) 11011
An emergency button has been activated on the electric panel or on the loading pallet. Check
the protections indicated in the message as well. If necessary, check PLC input 7. To exit
emergency mode, press the luminous green START button. If the cause of the emergency
has been removed the green button will light up and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET
to enable the auxiliary power supplies.
Err 76 – STOP2 button active (Tooling panel emergency). IN63=0 90141

The emergency button on the tooling panel has been triggered. If necessary, check PLC input
63 which has to be zero. To exit emergency mode, press the luminous green START button. If
the cause of the emergency has been removed the green button will light up and PLC input 8
will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the auxiliary power supplies.
Err 77 – Tooling selector on. Automatic mode not allowed. IN15=1 26131
The tooling selector on the electric panel has been triggered. Only the relative functions are
active. When the selector is disabled the machine will be in emergency mode. To exit
emergency mode, press the luminous green START button. If the cause of the emergency
has been removed the green button will light up and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET
to enable the auxiliary power supplies.
Err 78 – Heat sensors of Trimming motors KO. IN31=1 26331

The thermal cutouts protecting the motors on the double edge trimming side have triggered.
Check the state of the motors. If necessary, check PLC input 31. To exit emergency mode,
press the luminous green START button. If the cause of the emergency has been removed
the green button will light up and PLC input 8 will indicate 1. Press RESET to enable the
auxiliary power supplies.
Err 79 – Edgebanding simulation with presser (glue roller diam. >= 40 e < 50 mm.)
Simulation of the edgebanding operation has been activated with the machine data item “glue
roller diameter” between 40 and 50 mm. If the panel is picked up the presser will be enabled.
Err 80 – Edgebanding simulation without presser (glue roller diam >= 50 mm.)
Simulation of the edgebanding operation has been activated with the machine data item “glue

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
roller diameter” greater than or equal to 50 mm. Even if the panel is picked up the presser will
not be enabled.
Err 81 – Machine in simulation (panel not picked up). IN16=1 26151

Edgebanding simulation is in progress without a panel being fastened to the pick-up unit
suction cups.
Err 82 – Edgebanding simulation with presser (from NC: YES PRES).

Edgebanding simulation has been activated using the data item managed directly by the
control editor. In this case there is no need to change any of the machine data. If the panel is
picked up the presser will be enabled.
Err 83 – Edgebanding simulation without presser (from NC: NO PRES).

Edgebanding simulation has been activated using the data item managed directly by the
control editor. In this case there is no need to change any of the machine data. If the panel is
picked up the presser will not be enabled.
Err 84 – TV axis on top overstroke micro. IN33=0 97111.

The TV axis supporting the working units is on the top overstroke micro. Return the axis to
within its operating field using the JOG commands. Press STOP and RESET and try again.
Err 85 – TV axis on bottom overstroke micro. IN34=0 97121.

The TV axis supporting the working units is on the bottom overstroke micro. Return the axis to
within its operating field using the JOG commands. Press STOP and RESET and try again.
Err 86 – Warning: RUNNING IN cycle enabled. To disable: emergency+RESET.

The running in cycle consists of the continuous repetition of a program in automatic. It is
enabled using bits 4 and 2 of byte MB4 (table can be accessed by pressing the softkey F1 on
the DEBUG page). To disable the running in cycle, switch the machine to emergency mode,
exit emergency mode by pressing the START button, and then press RESET.
Err 87 – Warning: MDI mode enabled: ABSOLUTE POSITION selected.

Absolute position MDI mode allows the user to set a position and to move the selected axis to
that position. To disable this function, press the softkey F1 (Zero) on the MANUAL page,
select the option MDI and the type of movement Stop MDI.
Err 88 – Warning: MDI mode enabled: INCREMENTAL POSITION selected.

Incremental position MDI mode allows the user to set a position value and to increase (or
decrease) the position of the selected axis by that value. To disable this function, press the
softkey F1 (Zero) on the MANUAL page, select the option MDI and the type of movement
Stop MDI.
Err 89 – Warning: JOG/MDI - POSSIBLE S. CUPS / D.E.TRIM UNIT. INTERFERENCE.

During movement of the axes in JOG or MDI mode, the user has attempted to move the
pick-up unit (suction cups) too close to the double edge trimming unit. Check the movements
and try again.
Err 90 – Warning: PROTECTIONS EXCLUDED in JOG/MDI. To enable: emergency+RESET.

The devices protecting against interference between the pick-up unit and the double edge
trimming unit in JOG/MDI mode can be disabled using bit 3 of byte MB4 (table can be
accessed by pressing the softkey F1 on the DEBUG page). To enable them again, switch the
machine to emergency mode, exit emergency mode by pressing START, and then press
RESET.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
Err 91 – Warning: SEMIAUTOMATIC MODE enabled. Disable using the NC button.

During automatic running of a program, semiautomatic mode has been enabled (LED on the
button on or flashing) by pressing the relative button on the NC. To disable, press the same
button again (LED on the button off).
(UU±QRWXVHG
/LVWRIFRGH3/&BPHVVDJHV
PLC_9000 - Machine data reading error

An error has occurred during reading of a machine data item by the PLC: the data item might
be missing or it might not coincide with the PLC’s expectations.
PLC_9001 - Thermal cutouts KO

Machine in emergency mode: the “Emergency Line OK” input is at zero (0). Initial status when
switching on or after an emergency. Supply power to the system and press Stop and Reset to
start. If the error persists, a thermal cutout might have triggered or the compressed air supply
might have failed.
PLC_9002 - Air Cords KO

Not used on standard machines at present.
PLC_9003 - Interference Micro

Not used on standard machines at present.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9004 - Inverter Emergency

On machines where the specific input is foreseen, this indicates that at least one spindle
inverter is in emergency mode (input value zero).
PLC_9005 - NC Emergency
The NC has detected an irreversible error condition caused by an incorrect data item or by
malfunction of one of its components.
PLC_9006 - Insufficient Vacuum

Vacuum failure error for machines without a specific input; in this case it is deduced that the
vacuum might have failed if the inputs for occupation of the work areas, mats or photocells,
are zero. The Start command on the machine-side button pad is disabled and the red light on
the electric cabinet (if there is one) starts to flash. Check that the vacuum pump is connected
properly.
PLC_9007 - Reset Slot necessary because Slots are down [cen]

After a RESET, the PLC has detected one of the following dangerous conditions for the
centre:
1. slide up sensor of a slot missing;
2. curtain guard up sensor missing (when curtain guards are fitted);
3. a tool has been removed/fitted manually on a spindle with automatic tool change.
This error cuts out all the controls for automatic movement of the machine, in zeroing and
program execution mode. To restore the situation to normal, if the sensors mentioned above
are operating correctly, the slot reset has to be obtained using the key or button provided.
PLC_9008 - Reset Slot necessary because of Manual Tool Change (cen) [slot]
The PLC has detected the following dangerous condition for the centre (cen) and the slot
[slot]:
- a tool has been removed/fitted manually on a spindle with automatic tool change.
program execution mode. To restore the situation to normal, if the sensors mentioned above
are operating correctly, the slot reset has to be obtained using the key or button provided.
PLC_9009 - Cycle stop from LH area safety device

After detecting that the operator has entered the left hand (LH) working area (mat or
photocells) the PLC has decided that the machine’s working cycle must be stopped to ensure
the safety of the operator. On EC Regulation machines the cycle restarts automatically as
soon as the operator leaves the area, whereas on non-EC Regulation machines the restart
cannot take place until the operator has left the area and pressed the START button.
PLC_9010 - Cycle stop from RH area safety device

After detecting that the operator has entered the right hand (RH) working area (mat or
photocells) the PLC has decided that the machine’s working cycle must be stopped to ensure
the safety of the operator. On EC Regulation machines the cycle restarts automatically as
soon as the operator leaves the area, whereas on non-EC Regulation machines the restart
cannot take place until the operator has left the area and pressed the START button.
PLC_9011 - Insufficient vacuum from specific input

Vacuum failure error for machines with the specific input. In normal operating conditions, the
input in question has value one. The Start command on the machine-side button pad is
disabled and the red light on the electric cabinet (if there is one) starts to flash. Check that the
vacuum pump is connected properly.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9012 - Cabinet temperature alarm

The temperature inside the cabinet is too high. In normal operating conditions, the input in
question has value zero.
PLC_9013 - reset SLOT/TH necessary to restart (cen)

On a machine fitted with horizontal spindles with bistable electrovalves, after a RESET the
PLC has detected the following dangerous condition for the centre (cen):
1. a machining operation has been blocked with horizontal spindles active.
program execution mode. To restore the situation to normal, the slots/THs have to be reset
using the key or button provided.
PLC_9014 - Not Used
PLC_9015 - Not Used
PLC_9016 - Centre data reading error

An error has occurred during reading of a data item in the plc “CENTRES” table by the PLC:
the item may be missing or it may not coincide with the PLC’s expectations.
PLC_9017 - Not Used
PLC_9018 - Centre Emergency (cen)
PLC_9019 - Incompatible Instructions (cen)

The program being run on the centre (cen) has attempted to perform one of the following
operations, which is incompatible with PLC specifications:
1. command an unmanaged M instruction;
2. simultaneous activation of different types of spindles (e.g. T and TH or T and TP, etc.);
3. activation of TPs other than those already active without TP0 (e.g. TP1 PON, .. work .. ,
PSU, .. posit.. .. , TP2 PON);
4. simultaneous activation of 2 TPs with the same inverter;
5. activation of a TP with no tool fitted.
PLC_9020 - End of program without TP0

The program being run has terminated without commanding shutdown of the active
electrospindle motors (TP0). (For XNC only: this error might also appear at the start of the
tool change cycle if there is no TP0 earlier in the program).
PLC_9021 - Zero. impossible: Z axes not zeroed (STOP/RESET) (cen)

The Z axis of the centre (cen) has not be zeroed or its position is more than
BAND_ZER=10mm from the axis point of origin: individual zeroing of the other axes on the
centre can only be performed after zeroing of the Z axis.
PLC_9022 - Not Used
PLC_9023 - TP on inactive slot (cen) (slot)

The program being run on the centre (cen) has attempted to carry out an operation on the

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
electrospindle fitted on the slot (slot), but the slot is not enabled in the plc table “SLOT_C1”
(Enable=0). The error is signalled in the following cases:
1. on activation of the TP for a machining operation;
2. on activation of the TP for a tool change operation.
PLC_9024 - Slot without automatic tool change (cen) (slot)

The program being run on the centre (cen) has attempted to carry out a tool change operation
on the electrospindle fitted on the slot (slot), but the slot is not enabled for automatic tool
change operations in the plc table “SLOT_C1” (ToolChange <> 2).
PLC_9025 - Not Used
PLC_9026 - Not Used
PLC_9027 - Not Used
PLC_9028 - Not Used
PLC_9029 - Axis drive KO (cen) (ax)

The drive of the axis (ax) on the centre (cen) is not Ok. This may occur when the machine is
switched on or because of a malfunction while the machine is active. The PLC switches the
machine to emergency mode. Check the drive display to see which error has occurred, and
solve it. The value that should appear in the input “Drive OK” is stated in the plc table
“AXES_C1” (data item Drlvok).
PLC_9030 - Slot data reading error (cen) (slot)

This message may appear for two reasons:
1. when the machine is switched on if an error has occurred during reading of one of the data
items in the plc tables “SLOT_C1” or “TP_C1” by the PLC: the data item may be missing or it
may not coincide with the PLC’s expectations;
2. during manual activation of the TP, if the TP which the user is trying to activate is not
enabled in the plc table “TP_C1” (Enable=0).
PLC_9031 - Slide travel impossible (cen) (slot)

The program being run on the centre (cen) requires the use of the electrospindle fitted on the
slot (slot) with the slide in a position that is incompatible with the indications found in the plc
table “SLOT_C1” (data item SlotType) (e.g.: the slot is indicated as having a normal slide and
the program requires the intermediate position).
PLC_9032 - Slot up/down sensor KO (cen) (slot)

The slide down and slide up sensors for the slot (slot) on the centre (cen) are excited: this
situation is unacceptable for machine safety, and the PLC will trigger an emergency. Check
the two sensors, as one of them is probably broken.
PLC_9033 - Slot down sensor timeout (cen) (slot)

The slide for slot (slot) on the centre (cen) has been commanded to descend, but the relative
sensor signal is not received. Check that:
1. there are no mechanical impediments;
2. no electrovalves have been switched manually;

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
3. the position micro is not broken;

4. the position of the micro is correct;
5. the state of the PLC outputs is correct;
6. the input to the relative micro is ON.
PLC_9034 - Slot up sensor timeout (cen) (slot)

The slide for slot (slot) on the centre (cen) has been commanded to rise, but the relative
PLC_9035 - Slot tool present sensor missing (cen) (slot)

The program being run on the centre (cen) requires the use of the electrospindle fitted on the
slot (slot), but the tool present input for this slot is missing. Check that the sensor is correctly
positioned / working properly.
PLC_9036 - Slot active with cone unlocked (cen) (slot)

While the centre (cen) is machining with the electrospindle fitted to the slot (slot), the tool
locked and present input has failed and the PLC has therefore triggered an emergency. If
there is a tool in the cone, check that the sensor is correctly positioned / working properly.
PLC_9037 - Not Used
PLC_9038 - Curtain guard sensor missing (cen) (slot)

The curtain guards protecting the (slot) on the centre (cen) have been commanded to
rise/lower, but the relative sensor signal is not received. Check that:
PLC_9039 - Bidirectional mill 1 sensors KO (cen) (slot)

The position 1 and position 2 sensors for the bidirectional slot (slot) on the centre (cen) are
excited: this situation is unacceptable for machine safety, and the PLC will trigger an
emergency. Check the two sensors, as one of them is probably broken.
PLC_9040 - Bidirectional mill in X sensor timeout (cen) (slot)

The X position of the bidirectional slot (slot) on the centre (cen) has been commanded, but
the relative sensor signal is not received. Check that:

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9041 - Bidirectional mill in Y sensor timeout (cen) (slot)

The Y position of the bidirectional slot (slot) on the centre (cen) has been commanded, but
PLC_9042 - Open cone timeout (cen) (slot)

During automatic tool change the cone in the slot (slot) on the centre (cen) has been
commanded to open, but the relative sensor signal is not received. Check that there are no
mechanical impediments and that the sensor is correctly positioned / working properly.
PLC_9043 - Close cone without tool timeout (cen) (slot)

During automatic tool change the cone in the slot (slot) on the centre (cen) has been
commanded to close, but the tool present and locked sensor signal is not received. If there is
a tool in the cone, check that the sensor is correctly positioned / working properly.
PLC_9044 - Inverter data reading error

An error has occurred during reading of a data item in the plc table “PLC_INV” by the PLC:
the data item might be missing or it might not coincide with the PLC’s expectations.
PLC_9045 - Motor stopped input timeout

The motor stopped input has not been received after a stop or after completing a machining
operation involving the inverter.
PLC_9046 - Inverter transmission failed (inv)

An error has occurred during transmission of the data to switch on the inverter (inv). The
control cannot communicate with the Inverter. Check the following:
1. check that the Inverter is turned on;
2. check the head setup machine data to ensure that the number of the inverter associated to
the active TP corresponds to an inverter that is enabled (Enable=1) in the plc table
“PLC_INV”;
3. check the head setup machine data to ensure that the “current” data item associated to the
active TP is correct for the type of inverter that is fitted;
4. check that the serial address of the inverter in the “PLC_INV” table (SerAdd) is the same as
the one set on the Inverter;
5. check that the inverter type in the “PLC_INV” table (Type) corresponds to the inverter that
is fitted;
6. check that the inverter parameters are correct;
7. check that the inverter enable output is ON;
8. check the wiring on the inverter and on the control.
PLC_9047 - Machining impossible: Inverter stopped (inv)

Although data have been successfully transmitted to switch the inverter (inv) on, the inverter
stopped input has remained unchanged and continues to indicate motor stopped. In this
condition the PLC blocks machining operations. As well as the checks advised for the
preceding error, also check that the remote switch output for the active TP is ON.
PLC_9048 - Buffered RAM KO

The PLC cannot write in the buffered RAM assigned to it. In this condition the machine will

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
continue to operate, but the PLC will not be able to save data, such as the hours, minutes and
seconds for lubrication.
PLC_9049 - Buffered RAM too small

The space required by the PLC in the buffered RAM is larger than the space assigned. In this
condition the machine will continue to operate, but the PLC will not be able to save any
excess data.
PLC_9050 - Lubrication data reading error

An error has occurred during reading of a data item in the plc table “LUB” by the PLC: the
data item might be missing or it might not coincide with the PLC’s expectations.
PLC_9051 - Not Used
PLC_9052 - System lubrication time finished

On machines with manual lubrication, this warns that it is necessary to lubricate the machine
components.
PLC_9053 - System out of lubricant

On machines with automatic lubrication, this warns that the lubricant in the automatic
lubrication system is finished.
PLC_9054 - System OK Lubrication cycle microswitch malfunction

On machines with automatic lubrication: a lubrication cycle has been commanded, but it has
not been completed. Check using the manual cycle button.
PLC_9055 - Bad magazine number

This message appears for the following reasons:
1. when the machine is switched on, if an error occurs during reading by the PLC of a data
item in the plc table “PU_BM”: the data item may be missing or it may not coincide with the
PLC’s expectations. For each tool holder enabled, check that:
- a) the number of the relative magazine is 1 or 2;
- b) the relative magazine is enabled.
2. during manual activation or during automatic tool change if the number of the magazine to
which the tool holder belongs has been indicated incorrectly in the “Magazines” machine
data.
PLC_9056 - Bad tool holder number

item in the plc table “PU_BM”: the data item may be missing or it may not coincide with the
PLC’s expectations. For each tool holder enabled, check that the number “N_pu” is greater
than 0 and not greater than the number of tool holders foreseen for the relative magazine in
the table “MAG_BM”;
2. during manual activation or during automatic tool change if the user attempts to use a tool
holder active in the “Magazines” machine data but not enabled in the plc table “PU_BM”.
PLC_9057 - Bad TP number

An attempt has been made to perform an automatic tool change from the machine-side
magazine to a bad TP or one that has not been enabled in the plc table “TP_C1”.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9058 - Not Used
PLC_9059 - Bad tool change operation code

The PLC has received an unforeseen code for a tool change operation on the machine-side
magazine. Check the tooling, magazine and program data.
PLC_9060 - Not Used
PLC_9061 - Not Used
PLC_9062 - Not Used
PLC_9063 - Tool change magazine sensors KO (mag)

The cylinder of the cover on the machine-side magazine (mag) has both position
microswitches set to ON. Check the two sensors, as one of them is probably broken.
PLC_9064 - Machine-side magazine closed but does not move (mag)

The machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to close, but the cover does
not move. Check that:
3. the coil is receiving power;
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for closed = ON and PLC output for
open = OFF).
PLC_9065 - Machine-side magazine closed but sensor not found (mag)

The machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to close, but the relative
PLC_9066 - Machine-side magazine open but does not move (mag)

The machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to open, but the cover does
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for closed = OFF and PLC output for
open = ON).
PLC_9067 - Machine-side magazine open but sensor not found (mag)

The machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to open, but the relative

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9068 - Tool change tool holder sensors KO (mag) (npu)

The cylinder of the tool holder (npu) on the machine-side tool magazine (mag) has both
position microswitches set to ON. Check the two sensors, as one is probably broken.
PLC_9069 - Machine-side tool holder down but does not move (mag) (npu)
The tool holder (npu) on the machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to
lower, but it does not move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for down = ON and PLC output for up =
OFF).
PLC_9070 - Machine-side tool holder down but sensor not found (mag) (npu)
The tool holder (npu) on the machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to
lower, but the relative sensor signal is not received. Check that:
PLC_9071 - Machine-side tool holder up but does not move (mag) (npu)
The tool holder (npu) on the machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to rise,
but does not move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for down = OFF and PLC output for up
= ON).
PLC_9072 - Machine-side tool holder up but sensor not found (mag) (npu)
The tool holder (npu) on the machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to rise,
but the relative sensor signal is not received. Check that:
PLC_9073 - Not Used
PLC_9074 - Raise tool holder commanded with magazine closed

The tool holder has been commanded to rise with the machine-side tool magazine (mag)
closed.
PLC_9075 - Close magazine commanded with tool holder up

The machine-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to close with the tool holder
up. If the tool holder is down, check that the relative microswitches are excited.
PLC_9076 - Load from empty tool holder (mag)

An attempt has been made to load the tool from an empty tool holder on the machine-side
magazine (mag). If there is a tool on the tool holder, check that the presence microswitch is
working and that it is positioned correctly.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9077 - Unload to busy tool holder (mag)

An attempt has been made to unload the tool to a full tool holder on the machine-side
magazine (mag). If there is no tool on the tool holder, check that the presence micro is
PLC_9078 - Not Used
PLC_9079 - Load from tool holder to busy TP (mag)

An attempt has been made to load a tool from the magazine (mag) to a TP with a tool already
fitted. If there is nothing on the TP, check that the cone locked and present microswitch is
working and is positioned correctly.
PLC_9080 - Load to tool holder from empty TP (mag)

An attempt has been made to unload a tool to the magazine (mag) from a TP with no tool
fitted to it. If there is a tool on the TP, check that the cone locked and present microswitch is
working and is positioned correctly.
PLC_9101 - Bad carriage-side magazine number

item in the plc table “PU_BC”: the data item may be missing or it may not coincide with the
PLC’s expectations. For each tool holder enabled, check that:
- a) the number of the relative magazine is 1 or 2;
- b) the relative magazine is enabled.
2. during manual activation or during automatic tool change if the number of the magazine to
which the tool holder belongs has been indicated incorrectly in the “Magazines” machine
data.
PLC_9102 - Bad carriage-side tool holder number

item in the plc table “PU_BC”: the data item may be missing or it may not coincide with the
PLC’s expectations. For each tool holder enabled, check that the number “N_pu” is greater
than 0 and not greater than the number of tool holders foreseen for the relative magazine in
the table “MAG_BC”;
2. during manual activation or during automatic tool change if the user attempts to use a tool
holder active in the “Magazines” machine data but not enabled in the plc table “PU_BC”.
PLC_9103 - Bad TP number

An attempt has been made to perform an automatic tool change from the carriage-side
magazine to a bad TP or one that has not been enabled in the plc table “TP_C1”.
PLC_9104 - Not Used
PLC_9105 - Bad tool change operation code

The PLC has received an unforeseen code for a tool change operation on the carriage-side
magazine. Check the tooling, magazine and program data.
PLC_9106 - Carriage-side tool magazine sensors KO (mag)

The cylinder of the cover on the carriage-side magazine (mag) has both position

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9107 - Carriage-side magazine closed but does not move (mag)

The carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to close, but the cover does
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for closed = ON and PLC output for
open = OFF).
PLC_9108 - Carriage-side magazine closed but sensor not found (mag)

The carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to close, but the relative sensor
signal is not received. Check that:
PLC_9109 - Carriage-side magazine open but does not move (mag)

The carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to open, but the cover does not
move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for closed = OFF and PLC output for
open = ON).
PLC_9110 - Carriage-side magazine open but sensor not found (mag)

The carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to open, but the relative sensor
signal is not received. Check that:
PLC_9111 - Carriage-side tool holder sensors KO (mag)

The cylinder of the tool holder on the carriage-side magazine (mag) has both position
PLC_9112 - Carriage-side tool holder down but does not move

The tool holder on the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to lower, but
it does not move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for down = ON and PLC output for up =
OFF).
PLC_9113 - Carriage-side tool holder down but sensor not found

The tool holder on the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to lower, but

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV

PLC_9114 - Carriage-side tool holder up but does not move

The tool holder on the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to rise, but it
does not move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for down = OFF and PLC output for up
= ON).
PLC_9115 - Carriage-side tool holder up but sensor not found

The tool holder on the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to rise, but
PLC_9116 - Not Used
PLC_9117 - Raise tool holder commanded with carriage-side magazine closed

The tool holder has been commanded to rise with the carriage-side tool magazine (mag)
closed.
PLC_9118 - Close carriage-side magazine commanded with tool holder up

The carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded to close with the tool holder up.
If the tool holder is down, check that the relative microswitches are excited.
PLC_9119 - Load from empty carriage-side tool holder (mag)

An attempt has been made to load the tool from an empty tool holder on the carriage-side
magazine (mag). If there is a tool on the tool holder, check that the presence microswitch is
PLC_9120 - Unload to busy carriage-side tool holder (mag)

An attempt has been made to unload the tool to a full tool holder on the carriage-side
magazine (mag). If there is no tool on the tool holder, check that the presence micro is
PLC_9121 - Carriage-side magazine not reset (mag)

The carriage-side tool magazine (mag) is in error mode and requires resetting.
PLC_9122 - Carriage-side magazine multiple tool holder selection

For carriage-side tool magazines it is only possible to perform manual selection of one tool
holder at a time. This message indicates that an attempt has been made to enable a second
tool holder without first disabling the previous one.
PLC_9123 - Carriage-side magazine tool holder rotation KO (mag) (cil)

The cylinder (cil) which rotates the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has both position

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9124 - Carriage-side TH backward rotation timeout: does not move (mag) (cil)
The cylinder (cil) which rotates the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded
to move backwards, but it does not start moving. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct.
PLC_9125 - Carriage-side TH backward rotation timeout: not arrived(mag) (cil)

The cylinder (cyl) which rotates the carriage-side tool magazine (mag) has been commanded
to move backwards, but it does not arrive. Check that:
PLC_9126 - Carriage-side TH forward rotation timeout: does not move (mag) (cil)
to move forwards, but it does not start moving. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct.
PLC_9127 - Carriage-side TH forward rotation timeout: not arrived (mag) (cil)

to move forwards, but it does not arrive. Check that:
PLC_9128-Both sensors enabled on Revolver Piston

Both the sensors for the revolver magazine are set to ON. Check the two sensors, as one is
probably broken.
PLC_9129-Revolver Piston ordered to rest position, but stationary

The revolver magazine has been ordered to the rest position, but the magazine does not
move. Check that:
2. no electrovalves have been triggered manually;
3. the supply voltage is reaching the coil, the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output
for rest position =ON and PLC output for forward position =OFF).
PLC_9130-Revolver Piston rest position Timeout

The revolver magazine has been ordered to the rest position, but the magazine has not
arrived. Check that:

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9131-Revolver Piston ordered towards slot, but stationary

The revolver magazine has been ordered to the position under the slot, but the magazine
does not move. Check that:
3. the supply voltage is reaching the coil;
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for rest position =OFF and PLC output
for forward position =ON).
PLC_9132-Revolver Piston towards slot Timeout

The revolver magazine has been ordered to the position under the slot, but the magazine has
not arrived. Check that:
PLC_9133-Both sensors enabled on slot baffle

Both the sensors on the slot baffle are set to ON. Check the two sensors, as one is probably
broken.
PLC_9134-Slot Baffle ordered down, but baffle remains stationary

The slot baffle has been ordered down, but the baffle does not move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for down =ON and PLC output for up
=OFF).
PLC_9135-Slot Baffle down Timeout

The slot baffle has been ordered down, but the baffle has not arrived. Check that:
PLC_9136-Slot Baffle ordered up, but baffle remains stationary

The slot baffle has been ordered up, but the baffle does not move. Check that:
4. the state of the PLC outputs is correct (PLC output for down =OFF and PLC output for up
=ON).
PLC_9137-Slot Baffle up Timeout

The slot baffle has been ordered up, but the baffle has not arrived. Check that:
PLC_9138-Pressure insufficient to unlock cone

The air pressure is not sufficient to unlock the cone during a tool change operation.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV
PLC_9139- Motor stopped input remains with inverter at working level

The inverter is transmitting normally to the motor, but the motor stopped input remains high.

(a223h001.fm-250200)
%
$SSHQGL[%
(UURUPHVVDJHV

(a223h001.fm-250200)
$SSHQGL[& *ORVVDU\
Backup
Procedure to create a backup copy of the data, generally on floppy disk.
CAD (Computer Aided Design)

A way of designing with the aid of software which plays an active role to support the operator.
Default
Base information used by the software in case the requested information is not specified by
the user.
EGA (Enhanced Graphics Adapter)

A method to plot the tool trajectory (profile) through special geometrical entities.
Floppy-disk
Disk for data storage.
Floppy-drive
Device to read the floppy-disk.
Offset
Distance from a reference point.
Absolute origin
Fundamental reference to determine the various machine offsets; it corresponds to the centre
of the head or the first spindle of the head in the position assumed after global reset of the
axes.
Password
Alphanumeric code which allows access to functions or protected data.
PLC (Programmable Logical Controller)
Restore
Procedure to restore, call, reset previous data.
Setup
Setting, preparation, organisation procedure.
Working field
Encoder

(glossario_h.fm-250200)
&
$SSHQGL[&
*ORVVDU\
FRL Unit
Slot
& BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(glossario_h.fm-250200)
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[ drawing grid

element labels ,
file extensions
graphics area
information on setup
information on use
lead-in and lead-out radius
moving the open box on screen
reference panel ,
reference panel origin
$ relationship bond between elements
accessing text in data fields ,
adjusting axis speed selecting profile elements
alignment of the profile selecting the base elements
axes setting automatic linking of points
reference for co-ordinates setting parameters
axis co-ordinates , , setup
axis co-ordinates reference temporary multiple solutions
axis reset state CAD file extensions
CAD popups
calculator
calendar ,
% characteristics
backup hardware
barcode labels CID
barcode reader clock ,
configuring the connection CNI-ISO
label type , CNI-ISO aggregate spatial orientation $
operating state CNI-ISO axes $
procedure for using CNI-ISO axis movement $
barcodes CNI-ISO axis position and origin assignment
configuring the connection $
information on use CNI-ISO axis positioning $
labels to be used CNI-ISO axis speed control $
reader operating state CNI-ISO chamfers and joints $
using the reader CNI-ISO comments $
base element CNI-ISO constants $
base elements CNI-ISO end of program/subroutine $
selection CNI-ISO example of program called “panca”
bevels on the profile $
boring unit CNI-ISO examples of possible A.G.P. cases
configuration $
breaking up elements on the profile CNI-ISO expressions $
CNI-ISO geometrical programming $
CNI-ISO instructions
aggregate spatial orientation $
& auxiliary functions for ISO expressions
CAD
angle connecting sections axes $
colours of elements axis movement $
connecting sections axis position and origin assignment
description of popup fields $
displaying labels axis positioning $

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
L
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
axis speed control $ colours

chamfers and joints $ when designing the profile
comments $ command fields
constants $ comment bar
end of program/subroutine $ concentric profile
example of program called “panca” configuration
$ boring unit
examples of possible A.G.P. cases electrospindles/slots
$ tool magazines
expressions $ work table
geometrical programming $ configuration of CID files
instruction qualifiers $ configuration of DXF files
interpolation $ connecting sections on the profile
intersection correction $ creating a program
labels $ current statistics files
line repetitons $ updating
list and syntax $ cursor
list of cases resolved by A.G.P. $ co-ordinates
machining examples $ pointer ,
modal instruction G $ cursor co-ordinates
operators and functions $ cutting
origins $
program example $
program jumps $
program steps $ '
programming $ data
spindle spatial orientation $ backup and restore
spindles and tools $ data fields
subprogram call $ debug machine activities
subprograms $ deleting
tool radius correction $ error messages
unit of measure $ deleting a program
use of discriminant $ deleting profile elements
CNI-ISO interpolation $ deleting the profile
CNI-ISO intersection correction $ deleting the tool radius correction
CNI-ISO labels $ description of software pages
CNI-ISO line repetitions $ designing the profile
CNI-ISO list of cases resolved by A.G.P. description of colours
$ dimensions
CNI-ISO machining examples $ piece to be machined
CNI-ISO operators and functions $ reference panel
CNI-ISO origins $ reference piece
CNI-ISO program example $ directory
CNI-ISO program jumps $ file types
CNI-ISO program steps $ list
CNI-ISO programming , $ routes
CNI-ISO spindle spatial orientation $ structure
CNI-ISO spindles and tools $ display machine activities
CNI-ISO subprogram call $ display of profile
CNI-ISO subprograms $ displaying error messages
CNI-ISO tool radius correction $ drawing grid
CNI-ISO unit of measure $ setup
CNI-ISO use of discriminant $ DXF
LL BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
general information PRF

layers restore
DXF-2D file backup
notions when drawing a profile file extensions
DXF-gen file restore
files
CID
DXF
( filling the profile
EGA forced lowering of electrospindles
arcs forced lowering of spindles
connections forced opening of the tool magazine
creating a drawing
description of commands
icons
segments *
EGA programming general state of axes
electrospindles graphic display of statistics
forced lowering graphics area
numbering CAD
electrospindles/slots creation of program
configuration cutting
element labels , drawing grid
emergency EGA designing
deactivating and resetting functions ISO interpreter
machine stoppage milling
triggering non-optimised boring
environment optimised boring
Automatic PRF profile designing
Editor running the program
Manual simulation
Setup work table
Statistics
error message bar
error messages
deleting +
display bar hardware
information on the messages displayed in characteristics
the message bar %
information on the messages displayed in
the popups %
errors ,
information on the errors displayed in the
icons
popups %
EGA
information on the messages displayed in
EGA designing
the message bar %
importing profiles
milling and cutting
non-optimised boring
optimised boring
) identification of machine serial number
file importing a profile
backup importing files
list of extensions information

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
LLL
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
cursor co-ordinates machining operations

dimensions of piece optimised boring using macros
name of list macro
program name BSM1
interface BSM2
hardware BSM3
software BSM4
ISO BSM5
ISO expressions BSM6
istruzioni CNI-ISO BSM7
parametri e vettori $ main status bar
manual statistics
MDI positioned movements
measurement of corners
- menu
jog movements bar
joining open profiles connection to softkeys
full display
menu bar ,
menu options
. milling ,
mirror image of the profile
key combinations
modifying a program
keyboard
modifying the base drawing
special functions
moving the profile
/ 1
list
name of list
machining
name of statistics file
name
non optimised boring
open
numbering
options
spindles and electrospindles
list name
lists
2
0 opening a program
operating diagnostics
M instructions
operator
machine operating state ,
data for statistics
machine operating status
operator activities
machine serial number
optimised boring
machining operation
BSM1 macro
cutting
BSM2 macro
milling ,
BSM3 macro
non optimised boring
BSM4 macro
programming steps
BSM5 macro
surface 5C
BSM6 macro
thickness tracing
BSM7 macro
use of external files
optimised boring macros ,
using the list
override
LY BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
displaying active value inserting the tool lead-in

procedures for use inserting the tool lead-in and lead-out
automatically
inserting the tool lead-in and lead-out
simultaneously
3 inserting the tool lead-out
page joining
AUTOMATIC/LIST mirror
AUTOMATIC/PROGRAM moving
body , open
CAD , , position values
EDITOR/PROGRAM reversing the direction of movement
EDITOR/SIMULATION
EDITOR/STATISTICS rotation around a point ,
heading , rotation around centre
main , scale
MANUAL , tool radius correction
menu bar total deletion
page body turning
page heading working depth
page name profile base drawing
panning commands available to draw a circle
parametri e vettori CNI-ISO $
password commands available to draw a line
deleting
entering commands available to draw a point
piece to be machined ,
planned maintenance copying elements
resetting times deleting elements
PLC version deleting whole drawing
popups modification
moving on the screen moving the elements
profile rotating
alignment profile element
base drawing profile elements
breaking up the elements selection
by linking of points profile fill
closed profile position values
concentric program
deleting procedure when resuming running
deleting elements simulation
deleting the last element created stopping and cancelling during running
deleting the tool radius correction
description program name
displaying the profile alone program parameters
fill programmable machining operations
filling programming
formed by joining up points , 3D movements of the tool
formed by tracing over the base drawing CNI-ISO instruction list $
, creating a program
importing cutting
inserting bevels deleting a program
inserting connecting sections events for statistics

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
Y
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
general operations to be performed selecting profile elements

selecting the base elements
graphics area semiautomatic
importing files running a program
M instructions setting parameters
machining on surface 5C profile
milling , setting up the work table
modifying a program setup
non optimised boring CAD
notes on measurement of corners simulation ,
optimised boring macros softkeys
piece information software
program parameters name
program stops name and release
programmable machining operations release
serial number of related machine
skipping program lines setup
steps starting
thickness tracing software identification ,
translation of program origin software name ,
work list software release ,
programming lines spindles
programming steps forced lowering
numbering
starting software
starting the program
5 statistics
raising or positioning the tool holders deleting
reference panel , disabling
relationship bond between elements enabling
resetting axes general information
automatic mode graphic display
manual mode information on name of statistics files
resetting planned maintenance times
restore marking events
rotation of profile , opening
rotation of the profile operator activities
running a list operator data
running a program procedure for use
cancelling programming events
in automatic mode reading
methods term for storage
semiautomatic mode statistics events
starting from a list marking
stopping statistics file events
running the program status bars
stopping a program
structure of the profile ,
closed
6 open
surface 5C
saving a program
scale of the profile
selectable drives
YL BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
7 =
table zoom
column
column heading
how to read
line
name
tables
temporary multiple solutions
thickness tracing
tool holders
raising or positioning
tool lead-in and lead-out on the profile
tool lead-in on the profile
tool lead-out on the profile
tool magazine
forced opening
tool magazines
configuration
tool radius correction on the profile
tooling
configuration of electrospindles/slots

configuration of the boring unit
configuration of tool magazines
configuration of work table
total deletion of the profile
9
varying the axis travel speed
:
WAIT C/SBLOC suspension
WAIT C/SBLOC
WAIT C/TRASL suspension
WAIT C/TRASL
WAIT S/SBLOC suspension
WAIT S/SBLOC
work list
deleting
opening, modifying and saving
work table
configuration
working depth on the profile

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
YLL
$QDO\WLFDO,QGH[
YLLL BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

(5804a0046IX.fm-250200)
%,(66(6S$
8QLWj&HQWULGL/DYRUR
6LWR&KLXVDGL*LQHVWUHWR
9LDGHOOD0HFFDQLFD
3HVDUR,WDO\
7HO
(PDLOVDOHV#ELHVVHLW
:(%6LWHKWWSZZZELHVVHLW

nc500 Software Ing

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

nc500 Software Ing

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

62)7:$5(86(5·60$18$/

Code: Issue: Revision: Approval number:

(*). Based on (previous document) 5804A0031.

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Part 4 - Programming machining operations

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

13.2 CAD setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Inserting the tool lead-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Temporary translation of program point of origin . . . . . . 16-60

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

A.3.1 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

A.7.1 Configuration of head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

The following is a list of the environments that make up the software.

Manual environment The group of pages using which it is possible to manage

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Statistics environment The group of pages containing information on events that

C Page menu bar.

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

A Date and time.

D Serial connection operating state.

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Name of the popup

Column Table name

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

List of machining operations

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

The following figure shows an example of a status bar.

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Information A The axis reset state.

C The type of reference used in the system for display of current

D The current axis position co-ordinates.

E Percentage value of the programmed axis speed.

F Number of rpm in the inverters.

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Information A The graphics area showing the piece.

C Name of the program, unit of measurement and configurations

Standard n Management of programming, that is to say creating, opening,

n Setting the configurations to be used for the machining

 BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Information A The graphics area showing the piece.

C Optimised boring programming lines.

D1 Bar with optimised boring set-up icons.

D2 Bar with optimised boring macro icons.

Standard n Programming operations relating to optimised boring.

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

Information A The graphics area showing the piece.

C Optimised boring programming lines.

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery

6WUXFWXUHRIGLUHFWRULHVGLUDQGW\SHVRIILOHFRQWDLQHG

BIESSE S.p.A. Woodworking Machinery